AQ2200 Multi-Application Test System Module Operation

Transcription

1 User s Manual AQ2200 Multi-Application Test System Module Operation 2nd Edition

2 Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products. YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services. Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our homepage. PIM E

3 Introduction Thank you for your purchasing of this AQ2200 Multi Application Test System. This user s manual describes the functions, operating procedures, and handling precautions necessary to operate the AQ2200 in correct and safe manner. Before starting operation, thoroughly read this manual to use the product properly. After reading this manual, always store it in a safe place where all concerned personnel can refer to it immediately. This manual is useful if the operator have forgotten proper operation steps during operation. In addition to this manual, two kinds of manuals shown below are provided for the AQ2200. Therefore, you need to read the following three manuals, as well as this user s manual. Manual Item Manual No. Description AQ2200 Multi Application Test System User s Manual (Module Operation) AQ2200 Multi Application Test System User s Manual (Application Operation) AQ2200 Multi Application Test System Communication Interface User s Manual IM This manual describers all functions of the AQ2200 Series Products except for application function and the communication functions, and proper operating procedures. IM This manual describers the Application functions of the AQ2200 Series Products. IM This manual describers the communication functions (remote control functions) of the AQ2200 Series Products. Notes Trademarks Revisions The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument's performance and functions. The figures given in this manual may differ from the actual screen. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer. Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited. This unit uses Montavista Linux. Montavista is a registered trademark or trademarks of Montavista Software, Inc. Linux is a registered trademark or trademarks of Linus Torvalds in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe, and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. In this manual, TM and marks are not indicated on the registered trademarks and/or trademarks of their respective companies. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. 1st Edition: September nd Edition: February nd Edition : February 2008 (YK) All Rights Reserved, Copyright 2007 Yokogawa Electric Corporation i

4 Manuals That Come with the AQ2200 AQ2200 Manuals The following manuals are provided for the AQ2200. Use them according to your application. User s Manual Module Operation User's Manual This manual. Mainly describes the individual operating procedures of the AQ2200 series frame controllers and modules. IM E [Contents] Chapter 1 Names and Functions of Parts Chapter 2 Explanation of Functions Chapter 3 Measurement Preparation Chapter 4 Optical Power Measurement Chapter 5 Optical Output Chapter 6 Optical Output Sweep Chapter 7 Optical Output Attenuation Chapter 8 Change the Optical Measurement Connection Route Chapter 9 BER Measurement Chapter 10 Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions Chapter 11 Setting the System Chapter 12 Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspection Chapter 13 Specifications Index User s Manual Application Operation User's Manual Mainly describes the AQ2200 application functions and operating procedures for application measurements with combinations of the various AQ2200 series modules. IM E [Contents] Chapter 1 About Application Function Chapter 2 Stability Measurement Function and Logging Measurement Function Chapter 3 Optical Reflection Attenuation/Insertion Loss Measurement Chapter 4 Swept Measurement Function Chapter 5 Manual Measurement Function Chapter 6 BER Measurement Function Chapter 7 Displaying the Graph of the Measurement Data Chapter 8 Measurement with the Trigger Chapter 9 Measuring the Optical Fiber Chapter 10 Measuring the Optical Device Chapter 11 Measuring the Bit Error Index ii

5 Communication Interface User s Manual User's Manual Manuals That Come with the AQ2200 Describes the functions of each communication interface on the AQ2200 and commands. IM E [Contents] Chapter 1 Remote Control Function Chapter 2 GP-IB Interface Chapter 3 Ethernt Interface Chapter 4 Before Programming Chapter 5 Commands Chapter 6 Sample Programs Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Appendix 1 Various Detailed Information Forms Appendix 2 SDH/SONET Frame Overhead Pattern Default Values iii

6 Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument. If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage, contact the dealer from which you purchased them. When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument, please give them the instrument number. Also, check that the model and suffix code on the name plate on the side panel of the module match those of your order. AQ2201/AQ2202 Frame Controller Model MODEL Suffix Code Description AQ2201 (3 Slots) AQ2202 (9 Slots) Power code -D UL3P -F VDE Standard (CEE-C7) -G SAA Standard (SAA-3P) -Q BS Standard (BS546 3P) -H BS Standard (BS 2P) Standard Accessories Name Q ty Notes User s Manual 3 Module, Application, Communication Interface Power cord 1 Interlock connector plug 1 Red 1 Black Trigger terminal dust covers 2 LAN connector dust cover 1 GP-IB connector dustcover 1 Fuses 2 Expansion unit connector cover 1 iv

7 AQ DFB-LD Module Model MODEL Suffix Code Description Checking the Contents of the Package Wavelength -Mxxxx See section 13.1 for the list of supported wavelengths -W nm -W nm Optical connector -FCA FC/AngledPC connector Optical output level -P10 10 mw optical output -P20 20 mw optical output Fiber -SMF SM fiber -PMF PM fiber External modulation -MODN No external modulation -MODS External modulation (sine) -MODC External modulation (chop) Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 1 Green Dust cap 1 For use with external modulation option User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ FP-LD Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Wavelength -W nm -W nm Optical connector /FCC AQ9441(FC) universal adapter /SCC AQ9441(SC) universal adapter Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 1 User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ DUAL FP-LD Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Wavelength -W135D 1310/1550 nm Optical connector /FCC AQ9441(FC) universal adapter /SCC AQ9441(SC) universal adapter Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 1 User s Manual 1 This Manual v

8 Checking the Contents of the Package AQ TLS Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Optical connector -FCA FC/AngledPC connector Fiber -SMF SM fiber Wavelength -WLSTD 1440 to 1640 nm Accessories Name Q ty Notes Wavelength Meter control cable 1 Dust cap (small) 2 Green Dust cap (large) 1 User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ Interface Module Accessories Name Q ty Notes Analog out plug 1 Optical sensor head connector cable 1 User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ Optical Sensor Head Model MODEL Suffix code Description Long-Wavelength Sensor Optical connector /FCC AQ9355C (FC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap /SCC AQ9335C (SC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap /STC AQ9335C (ST) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 1 Ring 1 User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ Optical Sensor Head Model MODEL Suffix code Description Short-Wavelength Sensor Optical connector /FCC AQ9355C (FC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap /SCC AQ9335C (SC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap /STC AQ9335C (ST) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 1 Ring 1 User s Manual 1 This Manual vi

9 AQ Sensor Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description High-Sensitivity Sensor Checking the Contents of the Package Optical connector /FCC AQ9447 (FC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap /SCC AQ9447 (SC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap /STC AQ9447 (ST) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 1 Analog out plug 1 User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ Sensor Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description High Power Sensor Optical connector -NON No connector adapter -FCC AQ9335C (FC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap -SCC AQ9335C (SC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap -STC AQ9335C (ST) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap -LCC AQ9335C (LC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap -MUC AQ9335C (MU) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 1 Green Ring 1 User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ Sensor Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Dual Optical connector -NON No connector adapter -FCC AQ9335C (FC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap -SCC AQ9335C (SC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap STC AQ9335C (ST) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap -LCC AQ9335C (LC) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap -MUC AQ9335C (MU) Connector Adapter with Light Shield cap Accessories Name Q'ty Notes Dust cap 1 Green Ring 1 User s Manual 1 This Manual vii

10 Checking the Contents of the Package AQ ORL Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Fiber -SA SMF (10/125) Accessories Name Q'ty Notes Dust cap 3 User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ ATTN Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Attenuator Optical connector -FCC FC/PC connector -SCC SC/PC connector -FCA FC/Angled PC connector -SCA SC/Angled PC connector Monitor port option /MON Monitor port included Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 2 Dust cap 3 When monitor port option User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ A ATTN Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Attenuator Fiber -SA SMF (10/125) -G6 MMF (62.5/125) Optical connector -FCC FC/PC connector -SCC SC/PC connector Monitor port option /MON Monitor port included Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 2 Dust cap 3 When monitor port option User s Manual 1 This Manual viii

11 AQ ATTN Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Optical Variable Attenuator Fiber -SA SMF (10/125) -G6 MMF (62.5/125) Optical connector -FCC FC/PC connector SCC SC/PC connector Checking the Contents of the Package Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 2 User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ OSW Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Optical Switch (1 4, 1 8) Port configuration Fiber -SA SMF (10/125) -G6 MMF (62.5/125) Optical connector -FCC FC/PC connector -SCC SC/PC connector Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 5 1 x 4 type: Five dust proof caps 9 1 x 8 type: Nine dust proof caps User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ OSW Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Optical Switch (1 16) Port configuration Fiber -SA SMF (10/125) Optical connector -FCC FC/PC connector -SCC SC/PC connector ix

12 Checking the Contents of the Package AQ OSW Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Dual Optical Switch (1 2, 2 2) Port configuration Fiber -SA SMF (10/125) -G6 MMF (62.5/125) Optical connector -FCC FC/PC connector -SCC SC/PC connector Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust cap 6 1 x 2 type: Six dust proof caps 8 2 x 2 type: Eight dust proof caps User s Manual 1 This Manual User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ BERT Module Model MODEL Suffix code Description Option /M 64 Mbit-program pattern option. WinPC software for creation of pattern and CF memory are included. /P1 SDH/SONET frame pattern option. WinPC software for create of pattern. Accessories Name Q ty Notes Terminator for circuit protection 6 This terminator is already attached to the output terminals. Protective cap 5 This protective cap is already attached to the INPUT terminals. User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator Model MODEL Suffix code Description Wavelength 1.55 µm Cutting direction of LN modulator -A X-cut -B Z-cut Optical connector -S SC connector -F FC connector Cable /P PMF (FC/APC-SC/PC) for 1.3 vm /U U-link coaxial cable x

13 Checking the Contents of the Package Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust Cap 2 Terminator for circuit protection 1 This terminator is already attached to the electrical terminal. User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator Model MODEL Suffix code Description Wavelength 1.31 µm Cutting direction of LN modulator -A X-cut -B Z-cut Optical connector -S SC connector -F FC connector Cable /P PMF (FC/APC-SC/PC) for 1.3 µm /U U-link coaxial cable Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust Cap 2 Terminator for circuit protection 1 This terminator is already attached to the electrical terminal. User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ Gbit/s Optical Receiver Model MODEL Suffix code Description Wavelength 1.31/1.55 µm Optical connector -S SC connector -F FC connector Cable /U U-link coaxial cable Accessories Name Q ty Notes Dust Cap 1 Terminator for circuit protection 1 This terminator is already attached to the electrical terminal. User s Manual 1 This Manual AQ XFP Interface Module Accessories Name Q ty Notes Terminator for circuit protection 2 This terminator is already attached to the output terminals. Protective cap 3 This protective cap is already attached to the INPUT terminals. User s Manual 1 This Manual xi

14 Accessories Product Name Model Specs AQ blank panel slot size 19-inch rack mount kit A (132.5) For AQ2202 mounting 19-inch rack mount kit C (132.5) For AQ2201 right-side mounting 19-inch rack mount kit D (132.5) AQ2201 left-side mounting AQ9441 (FC) universal adapter FCC FC connector for AQ /AQ AQ9441 (SC) universal adapter SCC SC connector, for AQ /AQ AQ9447 (FC) connector adapter FCC FC connector for AQ AQ9477 (SC) connector adapter SCC SC connector for AQ AQ9477 (ST) connector adapter STC ST connector for AQ AQ9335C (FC) connector adapter FCC FC connector for AQ /-221/-231/-241 AQ9335C (SC) connector adapter SCC SC connector for AQ /-221/-231/-241 AQ9335C (ST) connector adapter STC ST connector for AQ /-221/-231/-241 AQ9335C (LC) connector adapter M3407JD LC connector for AQ /-221/-231/-241 with a dust protection cap AQ9335C (MU) connector adapter M3407JE MU connector for AQ /-221/-231/-241 with a dust protection cap Light shielding cap (FC) FCC Light shielding cap for FC connector Light shielding cap (SC) SCC Light shielding cap for SC connector Light shielding cap (ST) STC Light shielding cap for ST connector Dust protection cap (LC) M3407HD Dust protection cap for LC connector Dust protection cap (MU) M3407HE Dust protection cap for MU connector AQ9346 tape fiber adapter AQ9302 (125) bare fiber adapter AQ9440B MT connector B Supports 2, 4, 8, and 12 cores xii

15 Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class I instrument (provided with a terminal for protective earth grounding). The general safety precautions described herein must be observed during all phases of operation. If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual, the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired. Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements. The followingsymbols are used on this instrument. Warning: handle with care. Refer to the user s manual or service manual. This symbol appears on dangerous locations on the instrument which require special instructions for proper handling or use. The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions. Functional ground terminal (do not use this terminal as a protective ground terminal.) Alternating current In-position of a bi-stable push control Out-posotion of a bi-stable push control Hazard, radiation of laser apparatus xiii

16 Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the precautions below. Not complying might result in injury or death. WARNING Use the Correct Power Supply Before connecting the power cord, ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply voltage of the DL9710 and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord. Use the Correct Power Cord and Plug To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire, be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA. The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective earth terminal. Do not invalidate this protection by using an extension cord without protective earth grounding. Connect the Protective Grounding Terminal Make sure to connect the protective earth to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power. The power cord that comes with the instrument is a threepin type power cord. Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three-pin outlet. Do Not Impair the Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal. Doing so poses a potential shock hazard. Do Not Operate with Defective Protective Grounding or Fuse Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective. Make sure to check them before operation. Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors. Operation in such environments constitutes a safety hazard. Do Not Remove Covers The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only. Opening the cover is dangerous, because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages. Ground the Instrument before Making External Connections Securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or an external control unit. If you are going to touch the circuit, make sure to turn OFF the circuit and check that no voltage is present. To prevent the possibility of electric shock or an accident, connect the ground of the probe and input connector to the ground of the item being measured. In Using the Modules Do not apply input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage, withstand voltage, or allowable surge voltage. To prevent the possibility of electric shock, be sure to fasten the module screws. Otherwise, the electrical protection function and the mechanical protection function will not be activated. Avoid continuous connection under an environment in which the allowable surge voltage or greater voltage may occur. GaAs The devices used in this product contains gallium arsenide (GaAs). Particles and vapors of GaAs are very dangerous. The product must therefore never be burnt, destroyed, cut, crushed or chemically disassembled. It must be separated from general industrial waste and household rubbish, and disposed of according to local regulations. xiv

17 Safety Precautions Disposal of the Instruments When disposing of this unit, do not attempt to throw it into the fire. Doing so may cause the unit to explode, resulting in fire, personal injury, or burn hazard. This unit complies with Class 1M laser product defined in IEC , Never look at the optical output connector or the top end of the optical fiber connected to the optical output connector while the laser beam is being output. If the laser output is observed at a distance of 100mm or less from the laser beam emitting part by means of optical method (loupe, magnifying glass, microscope, etc.), this may cause eye injury. The invisible laser beam cannot be seen. However, if the laser beam enters your eye(s), this may cause eye injury and the eyesight to be ruined excessively. Safety Precautions for Laser Products This instrument uses a laser light source. This instrument is a Class 1M laser product as defined by EN Safety of Laser Products-Part 1: Equipment Classification, Requirements and User s Guide. In addition, the AQ2200 complies with 21CFR except for the items that deviate from the standard as a result of complying with Laser Notice No.50 dated on July 26, Laser Class 1M Label If the laser output is observed at a distance of 100mm or less from the laser beam emitting part by means of optical method (loupe, magnifying glass, microscope, etc.), this may cause eye injury. INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT (IEC :2001) Laser Class 1 Label If the laser output is observed at a distance of 100mm or less from the laser beam emitting part by means of optical method (loupe, magnifying glass, microscope, etc.), this may cause eye unjury. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT (IEC :2001) MODEL Class Laser Type Wavelength Maximum Output Power Diameter of Mode Field M DFB-Laser 1310 to1620.5nm 40mW 9µm FP-Laser 1310/1550nm 10mW 9µm M EC-Laser 1440 to 1640nm 50.2mW 9µm 0.1 Numerical Aperture Note Commercially available XFP transceivers mounted on the AQ XFP Interface Module are not covered under warranty. For safe handling of the laser, please consult the user s manual that came with the XFP transceiver. Make sure to comply with the precautions below. There are limitations to the operating environment CAUTION This product is a Class A (for industrial environment) product. Operation of this product in a residential area may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference. xv

18 Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), Directive 2002/96/EC (This directive is only valid in the EU.) This product complies with the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC) marking requirement. This marking indicates that you must not discard this electrical/ electronic product in domestic household waste. Product Category With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE directive Annex 1, this product is classified as a Monitoring and Control instrumentation product. Do not dispose in domestic household waste. When disposing products in the EU, contact your local Yokogawa Europe B. V. office. xvi

19 Conventions Used in This Manual Markings The following markings are used in this manual. Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument. This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the users manual for special instructions. The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the user s manual to identify those instructions. In the manual, the symbol is used in conjunction with the word WARNING or CAUTION. WARNING CAUTION Note Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user, and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences. Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user s data, and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences. Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument. Subheadings On pages that describe the operating procedures in chapters 3 through 11, the following symbols, displayed characters, and terminology are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations. Procedure Explanation Carry out the procedure according to the step numbers. All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind; experienced users may not need to carry out all the steps. This section describes the setup items and the limitations regarding the procedures. It may not give a detailed explanation of the function. For a detailed explanation of the function, see chapter 2. Used Characters In the operational description, keys are indicated as described below. Hard key: [ ] Parameter item: Function key: < > xvii

20 Contents Manuals That Come with the AQ ii Checking the Contents of the Package...iv Accessories... xii Safety Precautions... xiii Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment... xvi Conventions Used in This Manual... xvii Chapter 1 Names and Function of Parts 1.1 Frame Controller Light Source Module Optical Sensor Module ORL Module Attenuator Module Optical Switch Module BERT Module Optical Modulator Module Optical Receiver Module XFP Interface Module Chapter 2 Explanation of Functions 2.1 Light Source Function Optical Sensor Function Variable Attenuator Function Optical Switch Function BERT Function Optical Modulator Function Optical Receiver Function XFP Interface Functions Control Function Chapter 3 Measurement Preparation 3.1 Handling Precautions Connecting the Power Mounting/Removing the Module Connecting the Cables Connecting/Disconnecting the Connector Adapter Attaching/Removing the Blank Panel Connecting the Optical Fiber Cable Basic Operating Chapter 4 Optical Power Measurement 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Chapter 5 Optical Output 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module Optical Output by FP-LD Light Source Module Optical Output by DUAL FP-LD Light Source Module xviii

21 Contents Chapter 6 Optical Output Sweep 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Excutes the Sweep Trigger Output Wavelength Convergence Function Others Chapter 7 Optical Output Attenuation 7.1 Attenuation by ATTN Module Attenuation with the ATTN Module While Monitoring Light Chapter 8 Change the Optical Measurement Connection Route 8.1 Change the Connection Route ge OSW Module Chapter 9 BER Measurement 9.1 Basic Operating Procedures for BERT Module Operating the BERT Module by Itself Gbit/s Optical Modulator Gbit/s Optical Receiver XFP Interface Module Chapter 10 Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions Deleting the File Selecting a Storage Device Chapter 11 Setting the System 11.1 Setting the Date and Time Setting the Network Locking the Laser Output Read Out the System Condition Setting the Display Returning the Initial Settings Chapter 12 Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspection 12.1 Troubleshooting Error Messages Replacing the Module Updating the Firmware Routine Maintenance Recommended Replacement Parts Calibration Index xix

22 Contents Chapter 13 Specifications 13.1 AQ2201/AQ2202 Frame Controller AQ DFB-LD Module AQ /142 FP-LD Module AQ TLS Module AQ Interface Module AQ Sensor Module AQ Sensor Module AQ Sensor Module AQ /241 Optical Sensor Head AQ ORL Module AQ ATTN Module AQ A ATTN Module AQ ATTN Module AQ /412 OSW Module AQ OSW Module AQ BERT Module AQ / Gbit/s Optical Modulator AQ GBit/s Optical Receiver AQ XFP Interface Module External Dementions Index xx

23 Chapter 1 Names and Function of Parts 1.1 Frame Controller Names and Function of Parts Front View of AQ2201 Rear View of AQ2201 AQ2202FRAME CONTROLLER BS - FRAME DE TAIL CHAN USER1 HOLD APPLI DISP USER2 SYSTEM TOP CANCEL POWER ENTER 0 ON USER3 PRESET SHIFT OFF Front View of AQ T 5A 250V Rear View of AQ

24 1.1 Frame Controller No. Name Function 1 Slot For AQ2200 series module installation 2 Display screen 3 Function key For control and display of frame controller or module. 4 Hard key 5 Power switch Turns ON or OFF the power. 6 GP-IB connector In conformity with IEEE Fan For cooling of this unit 8 Trigger-Out connector Trigger signal output terminal, BNC connector 9 Trigger-In connector Trigger signal input terminal, BNC connector 10 Interlock connector Pin connector 11 Functional grounding terminal Grounding terminal 12 Power inlet Power connector with fuse 13 CF card slot For mounting of compact flash memory 14 LAN connector 10BASE-T compatible RJ-45 connector for connection of Ethernet 15 USB connector Type A connector in conformity with USB (Type-A) Rev USB connector Type B connector in conformity with USB (Type-B) Rev Extension connector - Display and Key Operation Console Display Function key Cursor key Hard key ENTER key CANCEL key POWER switch Display and Key Operation Console Function key: Function key is used to select or execute relevant item shown on the display. Display: Shows the measured value, set value, and status. Cursor key: and are used to change the module to be controlled, move the cursor, and change the numeric value. and are used to change the numeric value input digit position and input a backspace or negative sign in the ten-key pad mode. ENTER key: This key is used to set the selected item and input value. CANCEL key: This key is used to cancel the operation. POWER switch: This switch is used to turn ON or OFF the power. 1-2

25 Hard key: [PRESET]: [SYSTEM]: [DISP TOP]: [FRAME]: [APPLI]: [HOLD]: [CHAN]: [USER1]: [USER2]: [USER3]: [DETAIL]: [SHIFT]: 1.1 Frame Controller 12 keys are arranged and they have the following functions. Returns the parameters of the module actually mounted on the frame to their default statuses. Displays the SYSTEM SETUP screen. Hides the PARAMETER CHANGE screen. No function Displays the APPLICATION SELECT screen. When the module at the cursor position is the sensor, the updating of the measured data display is stopped. Changes the module to be controlled. A desired function can be assigned to this button. A desired function can be assigned to this button. A desired function can be assigned to this button. Switches the display between the SUMMARY screen and DETAIL screen. Changes to the ten-key pad mode (numeric value direct input). 1 Names and Function of Parts Display Screen The display screen is mainly classified into six screens shown below. INITIAL screen PASSWORD INPUT screen SYSTEM screen SUMMARY screen DETAIL screen APPLICATION screen * If any module is not mounted, only the SYSTEM screen can be operated. Power on INITIAL screen SUMMARY screen [SYSTEM] <CLOSE> SYSTEM screen [APPLI] <CLOSE> [DETAIL] <CLOSE> [SYSTEM] DETAIL screen [APPLI] <CLOSE> Screen Transition Diagram APPLICATION screen 1-3

26 1.1 Frame Controller INITIAL Screen After the power has been turned ON, shown in SYSTEM LOADING Screen appears, and then shown in INITIAL Screen appears. The system information and the module information are loaded while this screen is being displayed. SYSTEM LOADING Screen INITIAL Screen Note The initialization time (INITIAL screen display time) may become long depending on the type of the module mounted on the frame controller and the number of mounted modules. 1-4

27 1.1 Frame Controller SYSTEM Screen On the SYSTEM screen, you can check or change the following system parameters. Date (Year-Month-Day) Time GP-IB Address Network Set (IP Network address) Trigger Password Condition Check Lock (Locking of laser output) * Display Volume (Sound volume) Information (Unit information) Insert Module (Re-recognition of module) Update Load setting (Loading of set parameters) Save setting (Saving of set parameters) USB Storage Device (Selection of memory device for USB storage) File Delete (Clearing of contents in temporary memory, compact flash memory card, or USB flash memory device) Storage Memory (Selection of memory device for storage) 1 Names and Function of Parts Shows the contents of the item at the cursor position. Scroll the screen with the [ ] or [ ] key corrresponding to the cursor position. SYSTEM Screen * This parameter is shown only when the laser light source module (AQ , AQ , AQ , or AQ ),and the XFP Interface module (AQ ) is mounted. 1-5

28 1.1 Frame Controller SUMMARY Screen On the SUMMARY screen, the information on all mounted modules is displayed at once. You can display the main parameters, and check and change all the parameters. Current module: Module with blue background This module allows changing of the parameters. The changeable parameters are displayed as function keys. Current parameter: Parameter with light blue background Current module Current parameter The slot not mounted is displayed as NO MODULE. SUMMARY Screen of AQ2201 Note Error No.1014 may appear on this screen immediately after the unit has been started up. This error shows that the release version of the software installed in the module is not matched with that in the frame controller and a part of the operation may become faulty. If this happens, take appropriate actions, such as updating of the software. DETAIL Screen On the DETAIL screen, the detailed information on one module (current module) selected from those mounted is displayed. You can display, check, and change all parameters of the current module. The tab of the slot that becomes the current module is displayed on the front (top). DETAIL Screen 1-6

29 1.1 Frame Controller APPLICATION Screen The application is an auto measurement function with a combination of one or multiple modules. On the APPLICATION screen, you can select or execute various applications. 1 Names and Function of Parts APPLICATION Screen 1-7

30 1.2 Light Source Module AQ DFB-LD Module AQ DFB-LD MODULE CHOP ON CW OFF C W OPT CHOP 6 7 ANGLED PC ONLY EX T-CHOP (TTL) PMF+13dBm 8 Front and Side Views of AQ DFB-LD Module No. Name Function 1 CW/CHOP key Changes the laser output modulation. When set at CHOP, the modulation of the currently set frequency is performed. 2 Modulation indication LED Lit when the laser output is set at CHOP modulation. 3 OPT ON/OFF key Changes the laser output ON/OFF. 4 Laser output indication LED Lit when the laser output is ON. 5 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 6 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 7 Laser output Outputs the laser beam. 8 External modulation terminal Modulation signal input terminal (This terminal is used only when using the external modulation option.) 9 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 9 AQ FP-LD Module AQ FP-LD MODULE CHOP CW ON OFF 7 OPT OUT Front and Side Views of AQ FP-LD Module No. Name Function 1 CW/CHOP key Changes the laser output modulation. When set at CHOP, the modulation of the currently set frequency is performed. 2 Modulation indication LED Lit when the laser output is set at CHOP modulation. 3 OPT ON/OFF key Changes the laser output ON/OFF. 4 Laser output indication LED Lit when the laser output is ON. 5 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 6 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 7 Rear shell By connecting the AQ9441 Universal Adaptor, the laser beam can be output. 8 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1-8

31 AQ DUAL FP-LD Module AQ DUAL FP-LD MODULE CHOP CW OUT PUT Front and Side Views of AQ DUAL FP-LD Module No. Name Function 1 CW/CHOP key Changes the laser output modulation. When set at CHOP, the modulation of the currently set frequency is performed. 2 Modulation indication LED Lit when the laser output is set at CHOP modulation. 3 OPT ON/OFF key Changes the laser output ON/OFF. 4 Laser output indication LED When the LED on the 1310nm-side is lit, this shows the 1310 nm-laser output is ON. Accordingly, when the LED on the 1550nm-side is lit, this shows that the 1550 nm-laser output is ON. When both LEDs are lit, this indicates that both laser output wavelengths are ON. 5 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 6 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 1.2 Light Source Module 7 Rear shell By connecting the AQ9441 Universal Adaptor, the laser beam can be output. 8 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 8 1 Names and Function of Parts AQ TLS Module Front and Side Views of AQ TLS Module No. Name Function 1 OUTPUT Laser beam is output. 2 MONITOR Laser beam is emitted for the settling wavelength function of the Wavelength Meter. 3 OPT ON/OFF key Laser output is switched between ON and OFF. 4 Laser output indication LED This LED is lit when the laser output is turned ON. 5 Lock button for removal This button is used to lock the lever. 6 Removal lever This lever is used to mount or unmount the module. 7 CONTROL connector This connector is used for remote control of the Wavelength Meter for the settling wavelength function. 8 Screw This screw is used to fix the module. 9 Connector This connector is used to connect the electric signals between the frame and module

32 1.3 Optical Sensor Module AQ Interface Module AQ INTERFACE MODULE CHOP CW ANALOG OUT 7 HEAD Front and Side Views of AQ Interface Module No. Name Function 1 CW/CHOP key Changes the laser output modulation. When set at CHOP, the modulation of the currently set frequency is performed. 2 Modulation indication LED Lit when the laser output is set at CHOP modulation. 3 ZERO-SET key Starts the ZERO-SET. 4 Analog-out output terminal Outputs the voltage corresponding to the input light according to the analog output setting. 5 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 6 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 7 Connector Cable for connection of the optical sensor head is connected to this connector. 8 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1-10

33 AQ /-241 Optical Sensor Head Optical Sensor Module 3 1 Names and Function of Parts 1 Side and Bottom Views of AQ /241 Optical Sensor Head No. Name Function 1 Rear shell By inputting the spatial light or by mounting the AQ9335C Connector Adaptor, the light can be input using the optical fiber. 2 Connector By connecting the connection cable to this connector, this unit is connected to the AQ Interface Module. 3 Mounting groove This groove is used to fix this unit. The groove is threaded with a size of M6 and a depth of 5 mm. 1-11

34 1.3 Optical Sensor Module AQ /AQ Sensor Module AQ AQ Front and Side Views of AQ /AQ Sensor Module No. Name Function 1 CW/CHOP key Changes the laser output modulation. (AQ ) When set at CHOP, the modulation of the currently set frequency is performed. 2 Modulation indication LED Lit when the laser output is set at CHOP modulation. (AQ ) 3 ZERO-SET key Starts the ZERO-SET. 4 Analog-out output terminal Outputs the voltage corresponding to the input light according to the analog output setting. 5 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 6 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 7 Rear shell By connecting the AQ9447 Connector Adaptor, the (AQ ) optical signal can be input. Rear shell (AQ ) AQ Sensor Module (Dual) 4 3 By connecting the AQ9335C Connector Adaptor, the optical signal can be input. 8 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1 2 Front and Side Views of AQ Sensor Module No. Name Function 1 Rear shell By connecting the AQ9335C Connector Adaptor, the (OPT IN 1 (Device 1)) optical signal can be input. 2 Rear shell By connecting the AQ9335C Connector Adaptor, the (OPT IN 2 (Device 2)) optical signal can be input. 3 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 4 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 5 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module

35 1.4 ORL Module 1 AQ ORL Module 4 AQ ORL MODULE OPT*IN ANGLED PC*ONLY MEAS 2 3 OPT*OUT Names and Function of Parts OPT*IN OPT*OUT MEAS No. Name Function 1 Light measurement Connects to the DUT of which return loss is measured. 2 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 3 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 4 Laser input Optical signal is input to this connector. 5 Laser output Outputs the attenuated optical signal. 6 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1-13

36 1.5 Attenuator Module AQ A ATTN MODULE AQ / AQ A ATTN Module AQ ATTN MODULE 4 ENABLE DISABLE 2 1 ENABLE DISABLE INPUT OUTPUT 6 5 INPUT OUTPUT 6 MONITOR 8 MONITOR 8 OUTPUT/MONITOR 95%/5% AQ A AQ Front and Side Views of AQ / AQ A ATTN Module 7 No. Name Function 1 ENABLE/DISABLE key Makes the optical output enabled or disabled. ENABLE allows the optical output and DISABLE interrupts it. 2 Optical output indication LED Lit when the optical output is enabled. 3 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 4 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 5 Laser input Optical signal is input to this connector. 6 Laser output Outputs the attenuated optical signal. 7 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 8 Optical monitor output Outputs the attenuated optical signal on the monitor side. (Only when the optional monitor port is equipped.) AQ ATTN Module (with OPM for monitoring) 3 AQ ATTN MODULE 4 ENABLE DISABLE INPUT OUTPUT 6 Front and Side Views of AQ ATTN Module 7 No. Name Function 1 ENABLE/DISABLE key Makes the optical output enabled or disabled. ENABLE allows the optical output and DISABLE interrupts it. 2 Optical output indication LED Lit when the optical output is enabled. 3 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 4 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 5 Laser input Optical signal is input to this connector. 6 Laser output Outputs the attenuated optical signal. 7 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1-14

37 1.6 Optical Switch Module 1 AQ OSW Module 1 2 AQ OSW MODULE A Names and Function of Parts 4 A 1 4 Front and Side Views of AQ OSW Module (1 x 4 type) AQ OSW MODULE A A 1 8 Front and Side Views of AQ OSW Module (1 x 8 type) AQ OSW MODULE A A 1 16 Front and Side Views of AQ OSW Module (1 x 16 type) No. Name Function 1 Optical input/output part This port is connected to that you have selected in 2. (Common port) 2 Optical input/output part The port you have selected is connected to the (Select port) common port described in 1. 3 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 4 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 5 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1-15

38 1.6 Optical Switch Module AQ OSW Module (Dual: 1 x 2 type) AQ OSW MODULE DVC1 A DVC2 A A 1 2 Front and Side Views of AQ OSW Module (Dual: 1 x 2 type) No. Name Function 1 Optical input/output part Port [A] of 1 is connected to the port [1] or [2] of 2. (Device 1, Port [A]) 2 Optical input/output part Port [A] of 1 is connected to the port [1] or [2] of 2. (Device 1, Port [1], [2]) 3 Optical input/output part Port [A] of 3 is connected to the port [1] or [2] of 4. (Device 2, Port [A]) 4 Optical input/output part Port [A] of 3 is connected to the port [1] or [2] of 4. (Device 2, Port [1], [2]) 5 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 6 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 7 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. AQ OSW Module (2 x 2 type) AQ OSW MODULE DVC1 A B 1 2 DVC2 A B A 1 B 2 Front and Side Views of AQ OSW Module (2 x 2 type) No. Name Function 1 Optical input/output part Port [A] or [B] of 1 is connected to the port [1] or [2] of (Device 1, Port [A], [B]) Optical input/output part Port [A] or [B] of 1 is connected to the port [1] or [2] of (Device 1, Port [1], [2]) Optical input/output part Port [A] or [B] of 3 is connected to the port [1] or [2] of 4. (Device 2, Port [A], [B]) 4 Optical input/output part Port [A] or [B] of 3 is connected to the port [1] or [2] of 4. (Device 2, Port [1], [2]) 5 Lock button for removal For locking of the lever 6 Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. 7 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1-16

39 1.7 BERT Module 1 Front Panel [8] DATA OUT TO OPTICAL MODULATOR Data (for optical modulator) output terminal [10] Output indication lamp [9] Output ON/OFF switch [1] Module lock button [2] Module removal lever [11] DATA IN 1 (CDR) Data input 1 terminal (CDR built-in) Names and Function of Parts [4] DATA OUT Non-invert data output terminal [5] DATA OUT Invert data output terminal [6] CLOCK OUT Non-invert clock signal output terminal [7] CLOCK OUT Invert clock signal output terminal [14] REF CLOCK IN External synchronization signal input terminal [12] DATA IN 2 Data input 2 terminal (Without CDR) [13] CLOCK IN Clock input terminal [16] TRIGGER OUT Trigger signal output terminal [15] EXT CLOCK IN External clock signal input terminal [3] Fixing screw Front Panel of BERT Module No. Name Function [1] Lock button for removal For locking of the lever. [2] Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. [3] Fixing screw This fixing screw is used to secure this module to the frame controller. [4] DATA OUT *1 *2 Non-invert data output terminal. The non-invert data of 10 Gbit/s is output when Non-invert data output terminal the output is turned ON. [5] DATA OUT *1 *2 Invert data output terminal. The invert data of 10 Gbit/s is output when the output Invert data output terminal is turned ON. [6] CLOCK OUT *1 10 GHz-non-invert clock signal output terminal. The non-invert clock signal of Non-invert clock signal output terminal 10 GHz-band is output when the output is turned ON. [7] CLOCK OUT *1 10 GHz-invert clock signal output terminal. The invert clock signal of 10 GHz-band Invert clock signal output terminal is output when the output is turned ON. [8] DATA OUT Non-invert data output terminal. This terminal is used with this module combined TO OPTICAL MODULATOR *1 with the optical modulator. Data (for optical modulator) output terminal 1-17

40 1.7 BERT Module No. Name Function [9] Output ON/OFF switch This switch is used to turn ON or OFF the PPG signal outputs ([4] to [8]) at once. Every time this switch is pressed, the signal outputs are repeatedly turned between ON an OFF. When the output is turned ON, a load must be connected to the output connector. For output connectors not in use, the terminator supplied with the module must be connected. [10] Output indication lamp This lamp shows the output status of the PPG signal. The lamp is lit when the output is ON. On the contrary, the lamp is off when the output is OFF. [11] DATA IN 1(CDR) *2 ED data input terminal. Since the CDR (clock & data recovery) is built-in, the clock Data input 1 terminal (CDR built-in) input is not needed. [12] DATA IN 2 *2 ED data input terminal. Since this terminal does not have any CDR, it is necessary Data input 2 terminal (Without CDR) to input the clock to the clock signal input terminal [13]. [13] CLOCK IN ED clock signal input terminal. The clock of the data to be input to the data input 2 Clock signal input terminal terminal [12] is input. At this time, it is necessary to adjust the phase with the external phase shifter. [14] REF CLOCK IN External synchronization signal input terminal. The reference signal with a External synchronization signal input frequency, which is 1/16 or 1/64 of 10 Gbit/s rate, is input when the PPG signal is terminal generated with it synchronized with the external clock signal and without use of the SG inside this unit. This clock is used not only for the PPG, but also for the reference clock signal to operate the CDR function of the ED. [15] EXT CLOCK IN External clock signal input terminal. The clock at 10 Gbit/s rate is input when the External clock signal input terminal unit is operated using external clock signal at 10G bit/s rate without use of the SG inside this unit. This clock is used not only for the PPG, but also for the reference clock signal to operate the CDR function of the ED. [16] TRIGGER OUT Trigger signal output terminal. A trigger signal selected from the following is Trigger signal output terminal output. Clock trigger (1/16 or 1/64) Clock signal is output, which is 1/16 or 1/64 of the PPG or ED clock rate. Pattern trigger Trigger signal is output, which is synchronized with the PPG or ED pattern. Error trigger When the error is added in the PPG or when the error is detected in the ED, the trigger signal is output. For details, see section 2.5. *1: If this terminal is not used, always mount the accessory terminator. *2: For 10 Gbit/s-DATA input/output terminals, use an appropriate 3.5 mm-connector having excellent frequency characteristics. For coaxial cable to be connected, use a 3.5 mm-connector type cable having excellent characteristics and short length, where possible. Note When using [14] External synchronization input terminal and [11] Data input 1 terminal: When the input signal of [11] Data input 1 terminal of the ED is not synchronized with the PPG, make the settings so that the frequency 16 or 64 times larger than the reference signal to be input to [14] External synchronization input terminal is within ±100 ppm when compared to the input data rate. When using [15] External clock input terminal and [11] Data input 1 terminal: When the input signal of [11] Data input 1 terminal of the ED is not synchronized with the PPG, make the settings so that the frequency of the reference signal to be input to [15] External clock input terminal is within ±100 ppm when compared to the input data rate. 1-18

41 CAUTION 1.7 BERT Module This unit is a precision measuring instrument that handles 10 Gbit/s-super highspeed signals. If the following cautions are not observed strictly, the unit cannot show its maximum performance and the unit may malfunction. When connecting or disconnecting the cable to/from the input/output terminal, always turn OFF the output. When connecting the cable to/from the input/output terminal, tighten the connector at a specified tightening torque using a torque wrench. Do not open the output terminals [4] to [8] and terminate them with a 50 W-load (terminator supplied with the module). Additionally, terminate the end of the cable to be connected to the output terminal with a 50 W-load in the same manner as described above. Do not input a signal, which is the specified maximum input level or more, to the input terminal. When performing the connection work with the input/output terminal, use a grounding wrist so that the terminal is not charged by the static electricity. Additionally, if the connection cable is charged by the static electricity, this may cause the unit to malfunction. Therefore, perform the connection work after the cables have been discharged. Before connecting the unit to DUT *1, always turn OFF the output. When connecting the frame controller to the power supply, make sure to ground the power supply through a 3-wire power outlet or other measures. Make sure to use the specified connector to connect the input/output terminal of this module. If the terminal is connected to a connector other than that specified, this may cause the input/output terminal or the connector to break. Additionally, when connecting the input/output terminal to the connector, always connect it straight so that the input/output terminal and the connector do not slant. If they are connected slantwise, this may cause the core wire of the input/output terminal or the connector to break. 1 Names and Function of Parts *1: DUT Device Under Test. Device to be tested. Rear Panel [1] Connector Rear Panel of BERT Module No. Name Function 1 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1-19

42 1.8 Optical Modulator Module Front Panel [1] Lock button for removal [2] Removal lever [3] DATA IN Data input terminal [4] LD IN LD input terminal [5] OPT OUT Optical output terminal Front panel No. Name Function [1] Lock button for removal For locking of the lever. [2] Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. [3] DATA IN Electric input, 1.2 Vpp(Max) AC-coupling. Data input terminal. This terminal is Data input terminal connected to the DATA OUT (TO OPTICAL MODULATOR) terminal of the PPG of the BERT module with the U-link (optional) or coaxial cable. 500 mvpp ± 100 mvpp is recommended for the input amplitude. [4] LD IN Optical input, 16 dbm (Max). When using AQ (with PMF option) for the LD input terminal light source, connect this terminal with the PANDA fiber (optional). When using other light source, adjust the Slow axis of the polarized wave to the connector key position. Additionally, to ensure the stable operation of the Auto Bias Control, it is recommended to input a CW light in a range of 9 dbm to 13 dbm. [5] OPT OUT Optical output. The optical signal, the light intensity of which is modulated, is Optical output terminal output. Note When the performance stability of the extinction ratio is required, it is recommended to use this module after it has been warmed up for about 100 min. after the power has been turned ON. 1-20

43 Rear Panel 1.8 Optical Modulator Module 1 [1] Connector Names and Function of Parts Rear panel No. Name Function 1 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1-21

44 1.9 Optical Receiver Module Front Panel [1] Lock button for removal [2] Removal lever [3] Data output terminal [6] LOS LED [5] OVER LED [4] Optical input terminal Front Panel No. Name Function [1] Lock button for removal For locking of the lever. [2] Removal lever Used to mount or remove the module. [3] DATA OUT Electric output 300 mvpp, AC-coupling. Data output terminal Data output terminal. This terminal is connected to the DATA IN1 (CDR) terminal of the ED of the BERT module with the U-link (optional) or coaxial cable. [4] OPT IN Optical input 6 dbm (peak Max). Optical input terminal Optical input terminal. The absolute maximum rating is 6 dbm (peak) or 3 dbm (ave.). If the optical input exceeds the absolute maximum rating, this may cause the unit to break. Check the input level. If the input level may exceed the absolute maximum rating, protect the terminal using the optical ATT. [5] OVER The average power level of the receiving light is monitored to indicate whether or LED (Red) not it exceeds the OVERLOAD level. Lit *1 : This shows that the average power level exceeds the OVERLOAD level. Off: This shows that the average power level is less than the OVERLOAD level. [6] LOS (Loss of Signal) The average power level of the receiving light is monitored to indicate whether or LED (Red) not it is lower than the LOS level. Lit *1 : This shows that the average power level is less than the LOS level. Off: This shows that the average power level exceeds the LOS level. *1: Since the bit error is not detected, the bit error does not always occur even though the OVER or LOS LED is lit. Note When the performance stability of the minimum light receiving sensitivity is required, it is recommended to use this unit after it has been warmed up for about 30 min. after the power has been turned ON. 1-22

45 Rear Panel 1.9 Optical Receiver Module 1 [1] Connector Names and Function of Parts Rear Panel No. Name Function 1 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1-23

46 1.10 XFP Interface Module Front Panel 1 Button 4 XFP Transceiver Slot 2 Lever AQ XFP INTERFACE MODULE XFP Tx Rx 11 REF CLOCK IN External synchronization signal input terminal REF CLOCK IN (FROM TRIGGER OUT) 5 Laser output indication LED 6 OPT ON/OFF key 10 DATA OUT Non-invert data output terminal DATA OUT (TO DATA IN 1) DATA OUT 7 DATA OUT Invert data output terminal 9 DATA IN Non-invert data output terminal DATA IN (FROM DATA OUT) DATA IN (FROM DATA OUT) 8 DATA IN Invert data input terminal 3 Screw No. Name Function 1 Lock button for removal Lock button for removal of the module. 2 Removal lever Lever for removal of the module. 3 Screw This fixing screw is used to secure this module to the frame controller. 4 XFP Transceiver Slot For mounting of XFP Transceiver 5 Laser output indication LED Lit when the laser output is ON. 6 OPT ON/OFF key Changes the XFP Transceiver output ON/OFF. 7 DATA OUT Invert data of 10 Gbit/s output terminal. 8 DATA IN Invert data of 10 Gbit/s input terminal. 9 DATA IN Non-invert data of 10 Gbit/s input terminal. 10 DATA OUT Non-invert data of 10 Gbit/s output terminal. 11 REF CLOCK IN External synchronization signal of the XFP Transceiver. (1/64 of bitrate) 1-24

47 Rear Panel 1.10 XFP Interface Module 1 [1] Connector Names and Function of Parts No. Name Function 1 Connector Connects the electric signals between the frame and module. 1-25

48 Chapter 2 Explanation of Functions 2.1 Light Source Function Sets the Optical Output Level (DFB-LD Module) With the AQ , you can output the laser beam by specifying an absolute power value. The following shows the relationship among the laser beam output power, attenuation amount, and power offset value. Pdisplay(dBm) = Pdefault(dBm) - ATTN(dB) + Poffset(dB) where Pdisplay: Output power display value (dbm) Pdefault: Maximum output power at shipment (dbm) ATTN: Attenuation amount (db) (See Attenuating the Laser Output (page 5-4).) Poffset: Power offset value (db) (See Changing the Offset of the Display Output Power (page 5-5).) 2 Explanation of Functions Note The connector connection status, environment, and/or secular change may affect the Pdefault. Therefore, the values set in Pdisplay are not guaranteed. These values are used as reference. 2-1

49 2.1 Light Source Function Setting the Power (TLS Module) The following shows the Power of this unit and the adjustable range. [dbm] Power [nm] Solid line: Maximum power of each wavelength Shading range: The Power variable change range of each wavelength Dashed line: Minimum power of each wavelength Setting a desired power (manual) In the shading range shown above, the power of each wavelength can be set in steps of 0.1 db. This power is different from that set for each TLS module. Additionally, this power becomes the fixed output close to a range of 1440 to 1480 nm, which cannot be changed variably, according to the type of the module. Auto detection function of maximum power at a desired wavelength (Max) This function automatically detects the maximum power value of each wavelength shown by the solid line in the Fig. above. Auto detection function of power during sweep (Sweep Max) In the detection of the power during sweep, the power of each wavelength is lowered so that it is close to the wavelength having the lowest power in the wavelength range to be swept. This detection function is intended to make the power as constant as possible within the sweep wavelength range since this unit has the output characteristics shown in the Fig. above. [dbm] Sweep range Maximum power detected Power Level to be output actually [nm] 2-2

50 2.1 Light Source Function Changing the Wavelength (DFB-LD Module) You can change the laser output wavelength within a width of approximately 1.6 nm in steps of 1/1000 nm. The display wavelength has the following relationship. λ display (nm) = λ output (nm) + λ cal (nm) λ display (nm) x 10-9 = C / (f (THz) x ) where C: Light velocity in vacuum ( x 108 m/s) λ display: Display wavelength (nm) λ output: Output wavelength (nm) λ cal: Wavelength offset value (nm) f: Display frequency (THz) Note For details about λ cal, see Changing the Wavelength Offset (page 5-7). The currently set wavelength position to the allowable wavelength setting range can be checked using the wavelength bar on the DETAIL screen. This data is used as reference of the wavelength setting. 2 Explanation of Functions Wavelength bar Setting the Wavelength (TLS Module) The wavelength can be set in the following range. Range: to nm Coherence Control (DFB-LD, TLS Module) If the interference between the measurement system and object device to be measured may adversely affect the unit when starting the measurement, the output line width can be controlled by modulating the output light to relax the effects of the interference. Wide: By modulating Narrow, the light having low coherency is output. Narrow: Light having high coherency is output. Modulating Laser Output (DFB-LD and FP-LD Modules) CW (continuous light) or CHOP (50% DUTY) modulation can be performed on laser output. 2-3

51 2.1 Light Source Function Light Source External Modulation Input The light source external modulation input is supported only by the external modulation option of the AQ A signal satisfying the following requirements must be input to the external modulation input connector located on the front panel of the AQ When the external sine modulation option is selected Connector: SMA Input impedance: Approx. 50 W Maximum input voltage: 2 Vp-p Frequency: 100 Hz to 300 khz When the external CHOP modulation option is selected Connector: SMA Input impedance: Approx. 50 W Maximum input voltage: 5 Vp-p Frequency: 100 Hz to 300 khz Calibrating the Output Wavelength (TLS Module) Block Diagram This unit calibrates the wavelength using the built-in gas cell. Control unit LD Motor Mirror Optical output Gas cell for wavelength reference Warming Up The major leading particulars of this unit are specified in the status that the wavelength calibration is executed with the inside temperature of the unit kept stable. It is required to perform the warm-up operation for 1 hr. or longer until the temperature becomes stable from OPT-ON after the power has been turned ON under reference operation conditions (ambient temperature: 23±2 C). Therefore, you must wait until the warm-up operation is completed. Note When operating the unit before completion of warming up, variations in wavelength and/or power may occur. Additionally, when restarting the operation immediately once the power has been turned OFF, it is not necessary to warm up the unit for 1 hr. or longer. However, how the temperature inside the unit lowers may vary depending on the ambient temperature conditions. Therefore, the warm-up time for such operation is not specified. 2-4

52 2.1 Light Source Function Sweep Function (TLS Module) This sweep function variably changes the wavelength within the specified wavelength range according to the set conditions. This function is used to measure the characteristics when each wavelength transmits through the object device to be measured, such as wavelength transmission characteristics and/or wavelength dependent loss characteristics. An optimal sweep method can be selected from four sweep methods according to the measurement method. Manual sweep: Step sweep: Continuous sweep: Trigger sweep: The sweep is stopped temporarily at every specified wavelength step in the step sweep. The wavelength is changed variably while waiting for a specified period of time at every specified wavelength step. The wavelength is changed variably in the wavelength range. This trigger sweep is used to perform the measurement with the sweep while synchronizing with the external measuring instrument using the hardware trigger signal. 2 Explanation of Functions Manual Sweep After the sweep has been started, the wavelength is moved to the next wavelength within the set wavelength range (wavelength 1 to wavelength n) by operating the button. Only one sweep sequence is performed. Therefore, the sweep is completed when the measurement is performed until the set end wavelength (wavelength n ). Gain Wavelength 1 Wavelength 2 Wavelength n Lock Lock Lock Lock Lock Button Button Button Button operation operation operation operation Wavelength Sweep start Sweep end Images of Manual Sweep 2-5

53 2.1 Light Source Function Step Sweep After the sweep has been started, the wavelength is moved to the next wavelength at intervals of set wavelengths within the set wavelength range (wavelength 1 to wavelength n). Only one sweep sequence is performed. Therefore, the sweep is completed when the output is performed until the set end wavelength. When using other company s OPM (Optical Power Meter), the trigger output operation described in section 6.3 is set to Step Finished that outputs the trigger at the end of the step sweep in order to make the synchronization. Gain Wavelength 1 Wavelength 2 Wavelength n Lock Auto Auto Auto Auto Lock Lock Lock Lock Wavelength Sweep start Trigger output Trigger output Trigger output Trigger output Sweep end Used as sync signals to OPM. Images of Step Sweep Continuous Sweep After the sweep has been started, the wavelength is moved to the next wavelength at intervals of set wavelengths within the set wavelength range. In the continuous sweep, the wavelength is not locked, but the trigger is output at set sweep intervals. The trigger output operation described in section 6.3 is set to Step Finished that outputs the trigger at the end of the sweep. The synchronization with externally connected OPM unit can be made. Gain Sweep start Sweep end Wavelength Trigger output Images of Continuous Sweep 2-6

54 2.1 Light Source Function Trigger Sweep The sweep is started by the external/internal trigger within the set wavelength range (wavelength 1 to wavelength n). After the sweep has been started, the wavelength is moved to the next wavelength at intervals of set wavelengths. Only one sweep sequence is performed. Therefore, the sweep is completed when the output is performed until the set end wavelength. Gain Wavelength 1 Wavelength 2 Wavelength n 2 Explanation of Functions Auto Auto Auto Auto Lock Lock Lock Lock Lock Wavelength Trigger Sweep start Sweep end Images of Sweep Start by Trigger Input After the sweep has been started, the operation enters the trigger input wait status within the set wavelength range (wavelength 1 to wavelength n). The wavelength is moved to the next wavelength by the trigger input. Only one sweep sequence is performed. Therefore, the sweep is completed when the output is performed until the set end wavelength. Gain Wavelength 1 Wavelength 2 Wavelength n Lock Lock Lock Lock Lock Wavelength Sweep start Trigger input Trigger input Trigger input Trigger input Sweep end Images of Step Sweep by Trigger Input 2-7

55 2.1 Light Source Function Trigger Output A trigger can be output each time the sweep conditions specified in advance are executed. With this trigger output, you can add the AQ6317B/C Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA) and measure wavelength transmission characteristics through synchronous sweep measurement. This makes it possible to measure the high dynamic range, such as narrow bandwidth BEF (Band-Elimination-Filter). TLS module GP-IB control signal Optical spectrum analyzer Synchronizing signal Object device to be measured You can configure a synchronous sweep system consisting of TLS module and optical spectrum analyzer with AQ6317B/C and without use of personal control. Note When performing the synchronous sweep with the OSA, the wavelength range becomes 1440 to 1640 nm. Wavelength Convergence Function The wavelength convergence function can be used based on the AQ6140/6141 Wavelength Meter. Each wavelength convergence function AQ6140 is used.: ±10 pm AQ6141 is used.: ±3 pm * The wavelength accuracy may depend on the wavelength accuracy of the Wavelength Meter. Since each the Wavelength Meter has a specific wavelength accuracy, that is, AQ6140 ±3 pm (at 1550 nm) and AQ6141 ±1 pm (at 1550 nm), the wavelength accuracy of this system becomes the sum of the wavelength set by the wavelength convergence function and the wavelength accuracy of the Wavelength Meter. Control signal (CONTROL cable) TLS module AQ6140/6141 Wavelength Meter Object device to be measured Monitor light for Wavelength Meter Configuration of Wide-band High Wave Length Accuracy Light Source You can configure a high wavelength accuracy light source only with the AQ6140/6141 Wavelength Meter and without use of personal computer control and/or external coupler. 2-8

56 2.2 Optical Sensor Function Reference Function When measuring optical output level, the level can vary depending on the light source and measuring system (depending on the wavelength). Therefore when measuring the loss level of the DUT, you can set the optical output level of the light source and measuring system as a reference value ahead of time, and then display the difference (the relative value) between the reference value and the actual measured value (absolute value) for the measured results. You can switch the display between relative and absolute value. Wavelength Correction Function The sensor element has a wavelength sensitivity distribution. If you set the wavelength of light to be measured, the wavelength correction function inside the sensor suppresses variations in measured values due to wavelength sensitivity. 2 Explanation of Functions The power display unit is changed to dbm, db, W(abs), or W(rel). dbm and W show the absolute value while db and W(rel) show the relative value. Optical Power Display Function Additionally, the power display unit has the following relationship. PdBm = 10 x log (Pinput (W)/1x10-3 (W)) where PdBm: Optical input power (dbm) Pinput: Optical input power (W) Furthermore, the display values have the following relationship. PdBdisplay (dbm) = PdBm (dbm) + CAL (db) Pwdisplay (W) = 10 PdBdisplay (dbm)/10 x 10-3 PdB = PdBdisplay (dbm) PdBref (dbm) Pw = Pwdisplay (W)/Pwref(W) where PdBm: Measurement value (dbm) when set at dbm. PdBdisplay: Measurement display value (dbm) when set at "dbm". Pwdisplay: Measurement display value (W) when set at W(abs). PdB: Measurement display value (db) when set at db. Pw: Measurement display value (no unit) when set at W(rel). CAL: Power offset value (db) PdBref: Relative reference value (dbm) Pwref: Relative reference value (W) Note The power offset value is the offset value set in Setting the Power Offset Value. For details, see Setting a Power Offset Value (page 4-5). The relative reference value is the value shown in Reference. 2-9

57 2.2 Optical Sensor Function Average Averages the measured results within a specified time and displays the average. Note that the averaging time may vary depending on the modulation setting. Averaging Time by Modulation Setting Averaging time CW setting CHOP setting 100 ms Yes ms Yes ms Yes - 1 ms Yes - 2 ms Yes - 5 ms Yes - 10 ms Yes - 20 ms Yes - 50 ms Yes Yes 100 ms Yes Yes 200 ms Yes Yes 500 ms Yes Yes 1 s Yes Yes 2 s Yes Yes 5 s Yes Yes 10 s Yes Yes Note The AQ sensor module uses only CW setting and its setting range is 200 µs to 10 s. For the AQ Sensor Module, only for CW, the selectable range is 100 µs 10 s. When switching from CW mode to CHOP mode, if the averaging time is invalid in chop mode (e.g. 100 µs 20 ms), the averaging time is automatically set to 50 ms. When setting the averaging time to 100 µs 50 ms, if MaxMin mode is set to Window, the averaging time automatically sets to 100 ms. Measurement Mode Three kinds of measurement mode are provided. 1. Normal: Measurement is always performed to update the measurement value at any time. 2. Single: Measurement is performed once and the measurement value is updated after completion of the measurement. 3. Input Trigger: Measurement is performed by the trigger input and the measurement value is updated after completion of the measurement. Select an optimal measurement mode corresponding to the measurement application. Note For details about how to input the trigger, see section 2.5 in ther User's Manual for IM E. The measurement restart is accepted even while the measurement is running in the Single mode or Input Trigger mode. The measurement is performed only once in the Single mode or Input Trigger mode. After that, the measurement is not started until the Normal mode or Single mode is started or the trigger is input. When Input Trigger is set for both the device 1 and device 2 in the AQ , the average time setting is changed to a time longer than the value, which has already been set for the device 1 or device 2. Additionally, if the averaging time is changed in this status, the time settings of both the device 1 and device 2 are also changed. 2-10

58 2.2 Optical Sensor Function Measurement of Maximum/Minimum Value When measuring polarization dependent loss, etc., the maximum and minimum values are measured, and the difference between them is calculated. Measurement intervals can be selected with the following 4 modes for updating the maximum and minimum values Continuous: The maximum value, minimum value, and (maximum value - minimum value) are updated every time the measurement value is updated between the mode setting and mode OFF. Measurement value Meas 1 Meas 2 Meas 3 Meas N Measurement is Max/Min Update continued. Max/Min Update Max/Min Update Explanation of Functions Max/Min Update Date Points:N Measurement value Meas 1 2. Window: The maximum value, minimum value, and (maximum value - minimum value) are calculated from the measurement values of sample quantity specified in Data Points. For data, the latest measurement value is taken to update the measurement value while disposing of the oldest measurement value. Meas 2 Meas 3 Meas N Meas N+1 Meas N+2 Max/Min values are updated in this area. Max/Min values are updated in this area. Max/Min values are updated in this area. Measurement is stopped. 3. Refresh: This is the same as in Continuous mode, but after measuring the number of samples specified under Data Points, measurement stops. Measurement value Date Points:N Meas 1 Meas 2 Meas 3 Meas N Max/Min Update Max/Min Update Max/Min Update Measurement is stopped. Max/Min Update 4. Off: The modes set in 1 to 3 are turned OFF. Unless OFF is set, the modes set in 1 to 3 cannot be cancelled. Setting the Number of Data Points The number of measurement data points (1 to 20,000) to be used in the Window mode and Refresh mode of the Max/Min measurement can be set for the data points. Note For AQ , the number of data points setting becomes 1 to 10,

59 2.2 Optical Sensor Function Measurement Range The measurement range can be set in steps of 10 db. A measurement range can be selected from two modes described below. 1. AUTO range: An optimal range is set automatically corresponding to the input optical power. Normally, this mode is used. 2. HOLD range: A measurement range can be set manually. Note The measurement range currently being measured in the AUTO range mode is shown in brackets next to the AUTO in the Range field on the screen. When using the HOLD range, pay special attention so that the optical input power must be within the range during operation. The optical input power status within the range can be checked through the range bar. The range bar shows the currently input power graphically. The left end shows the lower limit of the range while the right end shows the upper limit. Additionally, if the measurement display value is shown in orange, this shows the measurement range-over. If it is shown in dark brown, this shows the measurement range-under. An optimal measurement range is selected so that the measurement value is shown in black, that is, normal color. Range Bar on DETAIL Screen Range bar Set the modulation mode (CW/CHOP) Function To accurately measure the optical power, you must set the modulation mode corresponding to that of the optical input. For the modulation mode, the CW light or CHOP (50%DUTY) modulation light can be selected. Additionally, select an optimal CHOP modulation light from 270 Hz, 1 khz, or 2 khz. Note The AQ sensor module is not applicable to the CHOP light. The AQ Sensor Module does not support CHOP light. ZERO-SET Function When performing the ZERO-SET, the electrical offset inside the sensor is adjusted, allowing you to accurately measure the absolute value. Two kinds of ZERO-SET modes are provided as described below. Zero : Zero ALL : Starts the ZERO-SET of the current module. Perform a ZERO-SET of all installed sensor modules and AQ ATTN modules. 2-12

60 2.2 Optical Sensor Function Analog Output Function The analog output function outputs voltages from the analog output terminal on the front panel according to the analog output mode. This enables analog output that corresponds to the input optical power in real time (voltage output of approximately 0 2 V). The following three modes are available for analog output. Select the mode most suitable for your application. AUTO mode: MANUAL mode LINEAR mode: LOG mode: For outputting voltages of approximately 0 to 2 V for each individual measuring range. For setting the maximum level (power level setting for outputting the analog output maximum value: typical maximum range value + 3 dbm typical minimum range value + 3 dbm (in steps of 0.1 db)) and power range (power range for analog output: 3 24 db (in 3 db steps)), and outputting voltages of approximately 0 2 V in proportion to optical power (W) falling within a specified range. For setting the maximum level (power level setting for outputting the analog output maximum value: typical maximum range value + 3 dbm typical minimum range value + 3 dbm (in steps of 0.1 db)) and power range (power range for analog output: 3 60 db (in 1 db steps)), and outputting voltages of approximately 0 2 V in proportion to optical power (db) falling within a specified range. 2 Explanation of Functions Examples of Analog Output in AUTO Mode and MANUAL Mode 2 Analog output (V) AUTO mode LINEAR mode LOG mode MANUAL mode settings Maximum Level: +0dBm Power Range: 24dB Optical power (mw) Analog Output Signal This connector can output a voltage according to the level of the optical signal input to the sensor. Modify the plug (supplied with the sensor) as shown below, and insert it into ANALOG OUT on the sensor s panel to output the voltage. Ensure that the length of the wiring is 2 m or less. Connector : Mini plug Output impedance : Approx. 1 kw Maximum output voltage : Approx. 2 V Signal line GND Solder Holding the Sensor Measurement Value Display You can stop the measurement data display update. With this function, you can check this measurement data record. 2-13

61 2.3 Variable Attenuator Function Sets the Optical Attenuation In the ATTN Module, you can attenuate the laser by specifying an attenuation. The following shows the relationship between the attenuation and attenuation offset value. ATTdisplay (db) = ATT(dB) + ATToffset (db) where ATTdisplay: ATT: ATToffset: Output power display value (dbm) Attenuation (db) (0 to 60 db, 0.001dB step) Attenuation offset value (db) (See Changing the Attenuation Offset Value (page 6-5). Sets the Wavelength In the ATTN Module, you can set a more accurate attenuation by specifying a wavelength. AQ For ATTN module applicable to SMF Maximum settable wavelength: Minimum settable wavelength: For ATTN module applicable to MMF Maximum settable wavelength: Minimum settable wavelength: AQ Maximum settable wavelength: Minimum settable wavelength: AQ A For ATTN module applicable to SMF Maximum settable wavelength: Minimum settable wavelength: For ATTN module applicable to MMF Maximum settable wavelength: Minimum settable wavelength: nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm Optical Output Set Function (AQ ) The optical attenuation is adjusted automatically so that the set optical output value is obtained. This optical output value includes the power offset value. PSETdisplay (dbm) = PSET (dbm) + Poffset (db) PSETdisplay: Setting the output power display value (dbm) PSET (dbm): Setting the output power value (dbm) Poffset: Power offset value (db) 2-14

62 2.4 Optical Switch Function This OSW module is used to change the connection route among multiple DUTs, which are connected to this module. Two kinds of modules are provided, one is the single type module constructing the configuration with one OSW (Optical Switch) and the other is the dual type module constructing the configuration with two OSWs. The following describes these module types. AQ OSW Module: Configuration with single OSW. Two kinds of OSWs are provided, 1 x 4 and 1 x 8. Modules for SM and GI with applicable optical fibers are provided for each OSW type. 2 Explanation of Functions A A x 4 OSWs (For SM and GI) 1 x 8 OSWs (For SM and GI) AQ OSW Module: Configuration with single OSW. OSW is provided 1 x 16. This module is applicable only for SM fiber. A AQ OSW Module: Configuration with dual OSWs. Two kinds of OSWs are provided, two 1 x 2 and two 2 x 2. Modules for SM and GI with applicable optical fibers are provided for each OSW type. Device2 Device1 A 1 Device2 Device1 A 1 2 B 2 1 x 2 Dual OSWs (For SM and GI) 2 x 2 Dual OSWs (For SM and GI) 2-15

63 2.5 BERT Function BERT Overview Major Features This module is a 10 Gbit/s-band BERT (bit error rate measurement) module to be mounted on the AQ2200-series Frame Controller. This module is a functional block that consists of a SG part generating the clock signal, a PPG part generating the pattern, and an ED part measuring the error. This module is a 10 Gbit/s-BERT module *2 to be mounted on the AQ2200-series Frame Controller *1. SG (Signal Generator), PPG (Pulse Pattern Generator), and ED (Error Detector) are provided. The 10 Gbit/s-band error bit test can be performed only with one unit. The module is applicable to the 10 Gbit/s-band bitrate. Bitrate: 9.95 Gbit/s to Gbit/s For the PPG output, the amplitude, offset, and cross point can be changed variably. Data output amplitude: 0.5 Vpp to 2.0 Vpp Data offset: -2.0 V to +3.0 V Data cross point: 30% to 70% CDR is built-into the ED. The bit error test can be performed without wiring of the clock signal. The receive threshold level of the data input signal of the ED can be changed variably. As for the output of the trigger signal of this module, the following usages can be done. As a trigger signal for measurement of waveforms As a frequency dividing clock for optical transceiver As a reference clock when synchronizing multiple module The BERT module is simply made applicable to the optical interface by combining the light source module *3, optical modulation module *4, optical receiving module *5, and/or attenuator module *6 of the AQ2200-series. By combining various modules of the AQ2200-series, a test system is constructed easily, in which the BERT is integrated with other applications. *1: AQ2201 Frame Controller (3-slot type) AQ2202 Frame Controller (9-slot type) *2: AQ Gbit/s BERT Module *3: AQ DFB-LD Module *4: AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator (1550 nm) AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator (1310 nm) *5: AQ Gbit/s Optical Receiver *6: AQ ATTN Module AQ A ATTN Module 2-16

64 2.5 BERT Function BERT Block Diagram The following shows the block diagram of this module. BERT module SG part 2 Frame controller SG control PPG part PPG control Program pattern memory Signal generation and analysis circuit SG SERDES Clock control AMP DFF output AMP AMP TRIGGER OUT REF CLOCK IN EXT CLOCK IN DATA OUT TO OPTICAL MODULATOR DATA OUT DATA OUT CLOCK OUT CLOCK OUT DATA IN 1(CDR) Explanation of Functions ED control DESERIALIZER DATA IN 2 CLOCK IN ED part SG part: Signal Generator In this circuit block, a highly accurate clock is generated based on the internal quartz oscillator. According to the bitrate setting, the frequency can be changed. PPG part: Pulse Pattern Generator In this circuit block, the PRBS pattern* and program pattern are generated. Additionally, in the AMP of the CLOCK OUT, the offset can be changed. In the AMP of the DATA OUT, the amplitude, offset, and cross point can be changed. ED part: Error Detector In this circuit block, the bit error is detected from the PRBS pattern* and program pattern, and then it is counted. (The bit error count results are informed to the frame controller at real-time.) *: PRBS pattern Pseudo Random Bit Sequence pattern (Pseudo random pattern) 2-17

65 2.5 BERT Function Data Logic Inverting Function This module provides a data logic inverting function that inverts the logic of the data output signal of the PPG and the data input signal of the ED. Logic Positive: Positive logic Negative: Negative logic Note The Positive/Negative logic is inverted at the data invert output terminal. Data Logic The following shows the data logic handled by this module. DATA OUT terminal Positive Negative H 1 H 0 L 0 L 1 DATA OUT terminal Positive Negative H 0 H 1 L 1 L

66 2.5 BERT Function Output Variable Change Function With this module, the outputs of the Data amplitude, Data offset, Data cross point, Bitrate, Bitrate offset, and Clock offset can be changed. With this output variable change function, the test can be performed corresponding to the interface conditions for the DUT. Additionally, the performance evaluation test of the DUT can be performed by changing the output level. Data Amplitude The amplitude of the data (DATA OUT/DATA OUT terminal) can be changed. Data amplitude: 0.50 to 2.00 [Vpp] Data amplitude 0.5 to 2.0Vpp 0.01 [Vpp] step 2 Explanation of Functions Note that the output of the DATA OUT TO OPTICAL MODULATOR terminal cannot be changed. Data Offset/Clock Offset The DC offset voltage of the data (DATA OUT/DATA OUT terminal)/clock (CLOCK OUT/ CLOCK OUT terminal) can be changed. For the DC offset voltage, the average value of the output level becomes the reference level. Data offset/clock offset: to 3.00 [V] 0.01 [V] step Data offset +3 V Data amplitude 0.5 to 2.0 Vpp Data offset 0 V Data amplitude 0.5 to 2.0 Vpp Data offset -2 V Data amplitude 0.5 to 2.0 Vpp For the Clock offset, the DC offset voltage can be changed in the same manner as described above. However, the amplitude is fixed at approximately 0.60 [Vpp]. 2-19

67 2.5 BERT Function Data Cross Point The cross point of the H/L level of the data can be changed. Data cross point: 30 to 70 [%] DATA OUT terminal 1 [%] step Data cross point 30% Data cross point 50% Data cross point 70% DATA OUT terminal Data cross point 30% Data cross point 50% Data cross point 70% When using DATA OUT, the signal of the cross point, that the setting ranging from 100% to set value is subtracted, is output. The cross point shows the value at the end of the recommended coaxial cable Sucoflex104 (L=0.7 m). 2-20

68 2.5 BERT Function Bitrate The bitrate of the internal SG can be changed. Bitrate: 9.95 to [Gbit/s] [Gbit/s] step 2 Bitrate 9.95 to Gbit/s Bitrate Offset The offset (frequency displacement amount) from the set bitrate can be changed. Explanation of Functions Bitrate offset: -100 to +100 [ppm] 1 [ppm] step Threshold Level Variable Change Function This module allows you to adjust the threshold of DATA IN1 or DATA IN2 to an optimal level. As you adjust the threshold while measuring the bit error, you can find the points both in the positive and negative directions at which an error occurs. The threshold can be set to an optimal level by setting the threshold value at the center of the range where no error occurs. Adjusting operation when the receiving signal level is low: When the receiving signal level is low, an error may occur. Even though the receiving signal level is low, you may remove the error by adjusting the threshold level. Adjusting operation when the upper and lower waveforms are not symmetrical. When the mark ratio is not 50%, the center of the amplitude may not be an optimal threshold. Even though the upper and lower waveforms are not symmetrical, you may remove the error by adjusting the threshold level. 2-21

69 2.5 BERT Function CDR Function CDR: Clock & Data Recovery This CDR function recovers the clock from the receive data signal and adjusts the retiming of the data. Since this module incorporates the CDR function, the module can perform the BER measurement without connection of the clock. Example of Connection with DUT The following shows an example of connection between this module and DUT using the CDR function. DATA IN1(CDR) DATA OUT DATA IN DUT DATA OUT 2-22

70 2.5 BERT Function Trigger Output Fuction Types of Triggers This module provides a trigger output function. One trigger can be selected from those listed below. Clock trigger: TX1/16 / TX1/64 / RX1/16 / RX1/64 Clock signal is output, which is 1/16 or 1/64 of the send clock rate of the PPG (TX1/16, TX1/64) or the receive clock rate of the ED (RX1/16, RX1/64). Pattern trigger: TXPatt / RXPatt Trigger signal is output, which is synchronized with the send pattern (TXPatt) of the PPG or the receive pattern (RXPatt) of the ED. PRBS pattern: Positive pulse signal for 128 bits is output at intervals of cycles 128 times larger than the PRBS pattern. Program pattern (16 to 256 bits): Positive pulse signal for 128 bits is output at intervals of cycles 128 times larger than the program pattern length. Program pattern (256 to 67,108,864 bits): Positive pulse signal for 128 bits is output at intervals of program pattern length. SDH/SONET frame pattern: Positive pulse signal for 128 bits is output at intervals of STM-64/STS-192 frame pattern length (155,520 bytes). 2 Explanation of Functions Error trigger: TXERR / RXERR When an error is added from the PPG to the data to be transmitted (TXERR) or when an error is detected in the received data in the ED (RXERR), a positive pulse signal for 128 bits is output. When even 1-bit error is added to or detected in the data, the positive pulse signal for 128 bits is output. If an error is added or detected again while a 128-bit positive pulse signal is being output, the trigger pulse is not output newly. When an error is added or detected at intervals of 128 bits, the pulse width of the trigger pulse signal is extended. 2-23

71 2.5 BERT Function Applications of Trigger Trigger is used as the trigger signal for observation of waveform. The trigger can be used as the trigger signal when observing the 10 Gbit/s-waveform with a super-high frequency sampling oscilloscope. (Clock trigger, pattern trigger, error trigger) Trigger is used as the frequency dividing clock signal for measurement of the optical transceiver. For optical transceiver or other device, when the frequency, which is 1/16 or 1/64 of 10 Gbit/s, is input as reference clock, the 10 Gbit/s-clock signal is generated. When measuring the optical transceiver, such frequency dividing clock signal may be required. (Clock trigger) Trigger is used as the reference clock to synchronize multiple module units. The trigger is used as clock signal for synchronization when using multiple module units with they synchronized. (Clock trigger) Trigger Waveforms Clock Trigger The following shows the relationship among clock trigger signal waveforms CLOCK TX1/16 TRG RX1/16 TRG TX1/64 TRG RX1/64 TRG TX1/16 TRG RX1/16 TRG TX1/64 TRG RX1/64 TRG 2-24

72 2.5 BERT Function Pattern Trigger PRBS Pattern The following shows the relationship among trigger signal waveforms of the PRBS pattern. One cycle of PRBS pattern 2 DATA OUT DATA IN (PRBS pattern) TXPatt TRG RXPatt TRG Positive pulse for 128 bits 128 cycles of PRBS pattern Positive pulse for 128 bits Explanation of Functions Program Pattern (16 to 256 bits) The following shows the relationship among trigger signal waveforms of the Program pattern (16 to 256 bits). One cycle of Program pattern DATA OUT DATA IN (Programpattern) TXPatt TRG RXPatt TRG Positive pulse for 128 bits Positive pulse for 128 bits 128 cycles of PRBS pattern Program Pattern (256 to 67,108,864 bits) The following shows the relationship among trigger signal waveforms of the Program pattern (256 to 67,108,864 bits). One cycle of Program pattern DATA OUT DATA IN (Programpattern) TXPatt TRG RXPatt TRG Positive pulse for 128 bits Positive pulse for 128 bits Positive pulse for 128 bits Positive pulse for 128 bits One cycle of Program pattern 2-25

73 2.5 BERT Function SDH/SONET Frame Pattern (155,520 bytes) The timing relationship between the trigger waveform and SDH/SONET frame pattern is as follows: DATA OUT DATA IN (SDH/SONET pattern) TXPatt TRG RXPatt TRG Positive pulse for 128 bits Positive pulse for 128 bits Positive pulse for 128 bits Positive pulse for 128 bits One period (155,520 bytes) of SDH/SONET pattern Error Trigger The following shows the relationship among error trigger signal waveforms. Error occurs at intervals of 128 bits or more. DATA OUT DATA IN (ERROR) Bit ERR Bit ERR Bit ERR TXERR TRG RXERR TRG Positive pulse for 128 bits Positive pulse for 128 bits Positive pulse for 128 bits 1-bit error occurs several times within 128 bits. DATA OUT DATA IN (ERROR) 1bit ERR 1bit ERR TXERR TRG RXERR TRG Positive pulse for 128 bits DATA OUT DATA IN (ERROR) 1-bit error occurs at intervals of 128 bits. 1bit ERR 1bit ERR TXERR TRG RXERR TRG 128 bit interval The trigger is not cleared and the trigger pulse is extended Positive pulse for 256 bits The timing of the 128-bit interval is arbitrarily determined inside the unit. 2-26

74 Connection Examples Error trigger is used as trigger signal for observation of waveform. 2.5 BERT Function 2 DATA OUT CLOCK OUT Phase shifter DATA IN TRIGGER OUT DATA OUT Oscilloscope Explanation of Functions DUT CLOCK IN Error trigger is used as reference clock of optical transceiver. LS EO BERT OE DATA OUT TO OPTICAL MODULATOR DATA IN1(CDR) LD IN DATA IN DATA OUT OPT OUT OPT OUT OPT IN Optical ATT TRIGGER OUT Optical ATT OPT IN OPT OUT REF CLK IN Optical transceiver Reflected TEST FIXTURE 2-27

75 2.5 BERT Function Error trigger is used as reference clock to synchronize multiple module units. MASTER SLAVE TRIGGER OUT REF CLK IN For details about connections, see section

76 2.5 BERT Function Pseudo Random Pattern (PRBS Pattern) Generation The following Table shows the principle of the pseudo random pattern generation. The pseudo random pattern is expressed by N-th generating polynomial expression shown in the Table below. The cycle becomes 2N-1. In the PRBS pattern having a cycle of 2N-1, the pattern, in which 1 is continued N bits, is generated only once during one cycle. Cycle Generating Polynomial Expression 1 + X 6 + X 7 For the output level of the PRBS pattern, 1 and 0 are applicable to the Low level and High level, respectively when the LOGIC is set at Positive. The mark ratio of the PRBS pattern of this module is fixed at 1/2. Pattern Generation Block 2 Explanation of Functions Output X 5 + X Output X 7 + X Output X 9 + X Output X 14 + X Output X 18 + X Output X 28 + X Output N : Shift register : Exclusive-OR 2-29

77 2.5 BERT Function Auto Sync Function In this module, the pattern is synchronized by the PRBS pattern or program pattern. This module provides an auto sync function that compares the input pattern with the reference pattern to automatically establish the pattern synchronization. Normal measurement For normal measurement, the auto sync function is turned ON and the input pattern is compared with the reference pattern to automatically perform the synchronization. In the auto sync function ON status, the input pattern is always compared with the reference pattern. Therefore, the auto sync function ON status applies to the normal measurement, in which only few errors occur and the sync loss does not occur. Note To turn ON the auto sync function, select ON with Auto sync on the ED page of the BERT application, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Measurement with many errors If many errors occur and the sync loss occurs, the error is not counted by the sync loss and the correct error measurement cannot be performed in the auto sync function ON status. In this case, the auto sync function is turned ON to establish the synchronization once. In this status, when turning OFF the auto sync function, the error measurement can be performed even though many errors occur and the sync loss occurs. When the auto sync function is turned OFF before the synchronization has been established, the input pattern is separated and the synchronization established pattern is compared with the reference pattern to lock the pattern synchronization circuit. When the correct pattern is locked, the sync loss is hard to occur. Note To turn OFF the auto sync function, select OFF with Auto sync on the ED page of the BERT application, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. When the auto sync function is turned OFF after establishment of the synchronization, the synchronization cannot be established. Synchronization establishment conditions/sync loss conditions Whether or not the synchronization is established is judged based on the threshold value conditions for the pattern synchronization. If the error rate exceeds the threshold value of the sync loss conditions, it is judged as sync loss status. Additionally, if the error rate becomes the threshold value or less of the synchronization establishment conditions, it is judged as synchronization establishment status. Furthermore, when the error rate always exceeds the threshold value of the sync loss conditions, the pattern cannot be synchronized. The following page describes the pattern synchronization threshold value conditions for this module. 2-30

78 2.5 BERT Function Pattern Synchronization Threshold Value Conditions Pattern Length Sync Loss Conditions Synchronization Establishment Conditions Measure Bit Error Bit Rate Measure Bit Error Bit Rate PRBS 2 n-1 (n=7, 9, 10, 11, 15, 23, 31) 8,192 1, E E-02 PROGRAM to 256 bits (*1) 16, E-03 16, E-03 pattern to 2,048 bits (*2) 16, E-04 16, E-04 to 8,192 bits (*2) 65, E-04 65, E-05 to 32,768 bits (*2) 262, E , E-06 to 131,072 bits (*2) 1,048, E-06 1,048, E-06 to 524,288 bits (*2) 4,194, E-06 4,194, E-07 to 1,048,576 bits (*2) 8,388, E-07 8,388, E-07 to 2,097,152 bits (*2) 16,777, E-07 16,777, E-07 to 4,194,304 bits (*2) 33,554, E-07 33,554, E-08 to 8,388,608 bits (*2) 67,108, E-07 67,108, E-08 to 16,777,216 bits (*2) 134,217, E ,217, E-08 to 33,554,432 bits (*2) 268,435, E ,435, E-09 to 67,108,864 bits (*2) 536,870, E ,870, E-09 (*1) Synchronization method: Bit Shift method (*2) Synchronization method: Read-in method 2 Explanation of Functions 2-31

79 2.5 BERT Function PRBS Pattern Synchronization Method The following shows the block diagram of the PRBS pattern synchronization method. PPG Shift Register DUT ED Error A B Shift Register Synchronization control When Auto Sync is OFF, the switch is fixed at B. When Auto Sync is ON, this switch is automatically switched between A and B. 2-32

80 2.5 BERT Function Program Pattern Synchronization This module provides two kinds of Program pattern synchronization methods as described below. 1. Bit Shift method (16 to 256 bits) 2. Read-in method (256 to 67,108,864 bits) 2 Bit Shift Method This synchronization method is applicable to a short program pattern with a pattern length of 16 bits to 256 bits. The following shows the block diagram of the Bit Shift synchronization method. PPG Memory (Max: 256 bits) Explanation of Functions DUT ED Error Memory (Max: 256 bits) Synchronication control Shift control The reference pattern is compared with the receive pattern. If these patterns are not matched, the pattern is shifted one bit and it is compared with the reference pattern. This bit shift is performed repeatedly until the receive pattern meets the reference pattern in order to establish the synchronization. Pattern length Reference pattern Receive pattern Compared with the reference pattern 1 bit 2 bits 1-bit shift 1-bit shift If not matched, the receiver pattern is shifted one bit and it is compared with the reference pattern. If not matched, the receiver pattern is further shifted one bit and it is compared with the reference pattern. N bits 1-bit shift If not matched, the receiver pattern is further shifted one bit and it is compared with the reference pattern. 2-33

81 2.5 BERT Function Read-in Method This synchronization method applies to the program pattern with a length of 256 bits to 67,108,864 bits. The following shows the block diagram of the read-in method. PPG Memory (Max: 64 Mbits) DUT ED Error A B Memory (Max: 64 Mbits) Synchronication control This synchronization method does not have any reference pattern. A pattern to be used as reference is made from the receive pattern and it is compared with the next receive pattern. Pattern length Receive pattern #1 (Reference) #2 #3 Comparison Comparison 2-34

82 2.5 BERT Function SDH/SONET Frame The SDH/SONET frame structure is shown in the following figure: 576 bytes bytes bytes 2 B1 B2 FAS SOH/TOH Payload Explanation of Functions SOH/TOH: Values stored in the main unit (can be rewritten using a CompactFlash memory card and all bytes can be set to desired values). Payload: All payload patterns are random (selected from PRBS9, PRBS10, PRBS11, PRBS15, PRBS23 and PRBS31). Scramble: Always set to ON (all bytes except for the first line of the OH section are scrambled in accordance with ITU-T G.707). B1, B2: Fixed values defined by SOH/TOH (provided with no computational parity bits) 2-35

83 2.5 BERT Function SDH/SONET Frame Synchronication Method Threshold Conditions for SDH/SONET Frame Synchronization Desynchronization Synchronization established Frame synchronization Payload pattern synchronization Measure Bit Error Bit Rate Frame synchronization patterns Measure Bit Error Bit Rate E-01 are encountered two frames in a row E-02 Flowchart of SDH/SONET Frame Synchronization/Desynchronization State of desynchronization State of synchronization Are the thresholds greater than those of desynchronization? Check for frame synchronization patterns Y N Y N Is F6F62828 h detected? State of desynchronization R Rearrange the order of input data Is a frame synchronization pattern encountered one frame later? Y N Lead in payload patterns using the payload section as the synchronization means (*2) Is PRBS pattern synchronization established within a single frame? Y N Synchronization established 2-36

84 2.5 BERT Function (*1) Frame Synchronization Pattern: The four bytes, i.e., the sum of the last two bytes of the A1 byte and the first two bytes of the A2 byte, are defined as the frame synchronization pattern (see the figure below) bytes 2 9 bytes A1 byte 576 bytes 192 bytes 192 bytes A2 byte Frame synchronization pattern (4 bytes) SOH/TOH Payload Explanation of Functions A1 byte: F6F6F6---F6 h (192 bytes) A2 byte: h (192 bytes) (*2) Lead in payload patterns using the payload section as the synchronization means: The synchronization conditions and method are the same as those for PRBS pattern measurement. 2-37

85 2.6 Optical Modulator Function Overview Major Features This unit is a 10 Gbit/s-band optical modulation module (optical modulator) to be mounted on the AQ2200-series Frame Controller. This module is a compact optical modulation module *2 to be mounted on the AQ2200- series Frame Controller *1. Applicable coding is NRZ and mark ratio is 1/2. An extinction ratio adjustment function is provided. The extinction ratio can be changed variably by adjusting the gain of the internal LN driver. A cross point adjustment function is provided. The cross point of the output waveform of the internal LN driver can be changed variably. An Auto Bias Control (ABC) ON/OFF function is provided. When this function is turned ON, the DC drift of the LN modulator can be corrected automatically. On the contrary, when this function is set at OFF, the DC bias can be set manually. An ABC Bias Slope switch function is provided. The polarity at the DC bias point of the LN modulator can be switched. This optical modulation module can easily be made applicable to the BER measurement of the 10 Gbit/s-band optical interface by combining it with the BERT module *3, light source module *4, and/or optical receiving module *5 of the AQ2200- series. By combining various modules of the AQ2200-series, a test system is constructed easily, in which the BERT is integrated with other applications. *1: AQ2201 Frame Controller (3-slot type) AQ2202 Frame Controller (9-slot type) *2: AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator (1550 nm) AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator (1310 nm) *3: AQ Gbit/s BERT Module *4: AQ DFB-LD Module *5: AQ Gbit/s Optical Receiver 2-38

86 2.6 Optical Modulator Function Optical Modulator Block Diagram The following shows the block diagram of this module. OPT OUT PANDA DATA IN LD IN PANDA Control circuit Cross Driver LN Modulator DCBias Data Gain Auto-Bias Control 2 Explanation of Functions Description of Block Diagram This optical modulator uses Lithium Niobate (LN) (hereafter referred to as LN modulator ). The data input to the DATA IN terminal is amplified by the Driver to supply it to the LN modulator. According to the above data, the intensity of the LD light, which is input from the LD INPUT terminal to the LN modulator, is modulated, and then it is output from the OPT OUT terminal. The control circuit controls the Driver Gain (Gain shown in the above Fig.) and Driver output cross point (Cross shown in the above Fig.). With this operation, the light waveform is controlled indirectly. The Auto Bias Control controls the feedback in order to automatically correct the DC drift of the LN modulator. 2-39

87 2.6 Optical Modulator Function Driver Gain The output amplitude setting of the internal LN driver output waveform and set value are displayed using the numeric values and graphs. As the output amplitude is changed, the extinction ratio can be changed. The setting range is 0 to shows the amplitude decrease (extinction ratio decrease) direction while 255 shows the amplitude increase (extinction ratio increase) direction. 14 Extinction ratio [db] [digits] * This shows a measurement example and does not guarantee the numeric values. Cross Point The cross point setting of the internal LN driver and set value are displayed using the numeric values and graphs. The cross point may depend on the ABC Slope. The setting range is 31 to 32. Cross point [%] [digits] * This shows a measurement example and does not guarantee the numeric values. ABC ON/OFF The ON/OFF setting of the auto bias control (ABC: Auto Bias Control) circuit can be made to automatically correct the DC drift of the LN modulator. When the ABC is set at ON, the ABC functions to automatically correct the DC drift of the LN modulator. When the ABC is set at OFF, the ABC does not function, allowing you to manually set the DC bias. 2-40

88 2.6 Optical Modulator Function ABC Slope Change-over When the ABC is set enabled, the polarity of the DC bias point of the LN modulator can be changed. It is possible to set whether the ABC is locked on the Positive (+) side or Negative (-) side. 2 Positive DATA IN OPT OUT Negative Explanation of Functions DATA IN OPT OUT 2-41

89 2.7 Optical Receiver Function Overview Major Features This unit is a 10 Gbit/s-band optical receiving module (optical receiver) to be mounted on the AQ2200-series Frame Controller. This module is a compact optical receiving module *2 to be mounted on the AQ2200- series Frame Controller *1. Applicable coding is NRZ and mark ratio is 1/2. A threshold value adjustment function is provided. An output ON/OFF function (operated only through GUI) is provided. Overload or Loss of signal is detected and LED on the front panel is lit. A simple power monitor function (-19 dbm to +5 dbm) is provided. This optical receiving module can easily be made applicable to the BER measurement of the 10 Gbit/s-band optical interface by combining it with the BERT module *3, light source module *4, and/or optical modulation module *5 of the AQ2200-series. By combining various modules of the AQ2200-series, a test system is constructed easily, in which the BERT is integrated with other applications. *1: AQ2201 Frame Controller (3-slot type) AQ2202 Frame Controller (9-slot type) *2: AQ Gbit/s Optical Receiver *3: AQ Gbit/s BERT Module *4: AQ DFB-LD Module *5: AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator (1550 nm) AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator (1310 nm) 2-42

90 2.7 Optical Receiver Function Optical Receive Block Diagram The following shows the block diagram of this module. LED OPT IN PIN -PD Power monitor Variable decision point TIA Control circuit Limiting Amplifier LOS detection OVERLOAD detection 2 Explanation of Functions DATA OUT Description of Block Diagram The PIN-Photodiode (hereafter referred to as PIN-PD) is used as the optical receiver. The optical signal input via the OPT IN terminal is converted to an electric signal and amplified by the Transimpedance Amplifier (hereafter referred to as TIA). This electric signal is identified at the preset threshold level (i.e. decision point) by the Limiting Amplifier (hereafter referred to as LA) in the next stage and output from the DATA OUT terminal as a digital signal. The module is also equipped with a simple power monitor function, which monitors the optical current of the PIN-PD. 2-43

91 2.7 Optical Receiver Function Data Threshold A threshold value is set to identify the logic to the electric data after completion of the optical-electric conversion. Setting range: -364 to 273 The following Fig. shows an example of the BER measurement by changing the threshold value. BER 1.E+00 1.E-01 1.E-02 1.E-03 1.E-04 1.E-05 1.E-06 1.E-07 1.E-08 1.E-09 1.E-10 1.E-11 1.E-12 SMF 7.5km received power -15dBm 1550nm 9.95Gbps,PRBS31 [degits] * This shows a measurement example and does not guarantee the numeric values. Sets the Wavelength A wavelength band (1.3 mm/1.5 mm) of the receiving light signal is set. With this function, the wavelength band sensitivity of the Input Power Monitor described in (3) Input Power Monitor below is corrected. Power Monitor Simple power monitor function. The average optical input power is displayed. Measurement range: -19 dbm to +3 dbm (accuracy: ±1 db) Note that the sensitivity correction by the temperature and wavelength within the wavelength band is not made strictly. Electric OUTPUT ON/OFF The data output (i.e. electric output) from the DATA OUT port is turned ON/OFF. Setting Function of Overload Point and LOS Point The detection levels for the Overload and LOS can be set. Overload point: -19 dbm to +2 dbm 0.1 dbm step LOS point: -19 dbm to +2 dbm 0.1 dbm step Detecting Function of Overload and LOS The LED goes on if the value exceeds the Overload level or falls below the LOS level. 2-44

92 2.8 XFP Interface Functions Power Supply The XFP interface module can supply power to the XFP transceiver compliant with the MSA stipulations and write to its internal memory. You can also perform BER measurement of the XFP transceiver by combining the 10Gbit/s BERT module. You can connect a 10 Gbit/s XFP Transceiver, supply a power source, data communication clock, etc., and send or receive electrical signals from the optical transceiver. Through this XFP interface, you can perform BER measurements using BERT modules. In addition to sending/receiving signals the XFP interface function can read alarm information such as for transceiver internal temperature and disconnection of the received signal. Four different DC voltages can be supplied: VCC5 (5 V), VCC3 (3.3 V), VCC2 (1.8 V), and VEE5 (-5.2 V). 2 Explanation of Functions Setup/Control Control of OPT OUT Changes the XFP Transceiver output ON/OFF. Control of Power Supply Adjusting the Power Supply of XFP Transceiver: VCC5 (5 V), VCC3 (3.3 V), VCC2 (1.8 V), and VEE5 (-5.2 V). Alarm and Monitor Displaying the Alarm You can display alarm output from the XFP Transceiver. Monitor Mod_NR(Module Not Ready) RX_LOS Interrupt Displays A/D converter values, temperature, and electric voltage inside the MSA compliant XFP transceiver. The following A/D values are monitored. Transmission bias current Optical output level Optical input level 2-45

93 2.9 Control Function Interlock Connector An interlock connector is provided as a laser output safety device. When this connector is open (i.e. the connector is unconnected), the laser light source cannot emit a laser beam (OPT LOCK). <How to Use the Interlock Function> Connect a switch to the interlock connector. Install this switch so that it operates simultaneously with the door or window. Make sure that this switch opens when the door/window opens, and closes when the door/window closes. Note When the interlock connector is open, LOCK is displayed in the OPT field on the Light Source modules and XFP Interface module (XFP transceiver installed). Use a cable of 3 m or less in length. <Disabling the Interlock Function> Connect a short-circuit plug to the interlock connector. GP-IB Connector A GP-IB interface is provided as a standard accessory. This enables setting/changing of various parameters and transfer of data via the GP-IB bus. An IEEE-488 compatible receptacle connector is used for this interface. Note The total length of connecting cables must be 20 m or shorter. The length of each cable between devices must be 2 m or shorter. The number of devices connected at the same time to the interface must be 15 or smaller (the number of devices that are turned ON must be 10 or smaller). 2-46

94 2.9 Control Function Trigger-in Connector/Trigger-out Connector The sensor measurement start signal can be input/output using these connectors. The signal can be received by all the sensors at the same timing. Connector: BNC Trigger-in: TTL level input Input impedance approx. 5 kw Low active Input pulse width 50 μs or longer Trigger-out: TTL level out Output impedance approx. 1 kw Low active Output pulse width approx. 50 μs Compact Flash Memory Card Use of a compact flash memory card enables data save, parameter save/read and firmware update. Before using a compact flash memory card, it must be formatted in VFAT format. This unit does not have the format function, so format must be carried out using an appropriate device. Additionally, if you insert and remove a compact flash memory card very quickly (i.e. within one second), the unit may go out of order. For general precautions for handling a compact flash memory card, see the user's manual attached to your compact flash memory card. 2 Explanation of Functions Note When turning ON the power with a compact flash memory card mounted, it may not be recognized correctly depending on the type of compact flash memory card. If this occurs, remove the compact flash memory card and mount it again. The compact flash memory card is then recognized properly. There are restrictions on the number of files that can be saved depending on the format of the medium. With FAT (16), a maximum of 512 files with MS-DOS file names can be saved, but only about 200 files can be saved depending on the file name. When attempting to save a file beyond this limit, a 1012 Corrupt Error occurs. In this case, you can delete files to reduce their number, or format the medium using the FAT32 format. 2-47

95 2.9 Control Function USB Memory As a USB flash memory device is connected to the USB connector (host) on the rear panel of this unit, you can use it as a data saving memory. Operating Conditions Item Specifications Format Supply current Operating Conditions USB1.1 Applicable to USB Mass Storage Class FAT format 200 ma Yokogawa does not guarantee normal operation of all the USB flash memory devices on the market. For reference purposes, we list the USB flash memory devices of which the proper operation has been verified. The following shows USB flash memory devices, the operation of which has already been confirmed. MAKER BUFFALO INC. TYPE RUF-C64ML/U2 RUF-C128ML/U2 RUF-C256ML/U2 RUF-C512ML/U2 RUF-C1GL/U2 RUF2-R1G-S RUF-C32ML RUF-C64ML Note There are restrictions on the number of files that can be saved depending on the format of the medium. With FAT (16), a maximum of 512 files with MS-DOS file names can be saved, but only about 200 files can be saved depending on the file name. When attempting to save a file beyond this limit, a 1012 Corrupt Error occurs. In this case, you can delete files to reduce their number, or format the medium using the FAT32 format. Temporary Storage Memory (Temporary Memory) You can use a memory built-into this unit as a data saving memory. A memory capacity of 10 Mbytes is prepared. Item Specifications Capacity Operating Conditions CPU bus access within frame 10 Mbytes Note As the temporary memory uses FAT formatting, there is a restriction on the number of files that can be saved. A maximum of 512 files with MS-DOS file names can be saved, but only about 200 files can be saved depending on the file name. When attempting to save a file beyond this limit, a 1012 Corrupt Error occurs. In this case, you can delete files to reduce their number. The data, which has been saved into the temporary storage memory, is cleared if any of the following conditions arises. Power OFF Application mode is executed. File Delete is executed. 2-48

96 2.9 Control Function Ethernet Communication This unit can be controlled remotely from a PC using communication commands via Ethernet interface. Ethernet Communication Specifications Number of communication ports: 1 Electrical/mechanical specifications: Conforms to IEEE Transmission method: Ethernet (10BASE-T) Transmission speed: Max. 10 Mbps Communication protocol: TCP/IP Connector: RJ-45 Connecting Method Connect the unit to the PC as shown below. 2 Explanation of Functions <Connecting to PC via Network> 10BASE-TX compatible translator (Hub or router) Frame controller main body PC Straight cable <Connecting to PC via Hub> 10BASE-TX compatible translator (Hub or router) Frame controller main body PC Straight cable <Connecting to PC Directly> Frame controller main body PC Cross cable Note If the unit is connected to the PC with a cross cable, it normally operates without problems, however, there is a possibility of improper operation because this connecting method is not supported by Ethernet requirements. In this case, connect them using straight cables and a hub. The total length of the cables must be 30 m or shorter. 2-49

97 2.9 Control Function USB Storage Function This unit can be connected as a storage device of the PC through the PC and USB cable, allowing you to save or load a file from/into this storage device into/from the internal temporary storage memory, mounted compact flash memory card, or USB flash memory device. Operating Conditions Item Connector shape Operating Conditions USB type B connector (receptacle) Electric and mechanical specifications In conformity with USB rev. 1.1 Number of ports 1 Applicable system environment Windows 2000/XP Connecting Procedures Connect the cables to the connectors on the rear panel as described below. PC USB cable Rear panel of AQ2201 Frame Controller WARNING label PC USB cable Rear panel of AQ2202 Frame Controller Note The USB storage function cannot be used in the application screen mode. The remote control and LAN FTP function cannot be used with the USB storage connected. The USB storage cannot be connected while the remote control is being connected or the LAN FTP function is being executed. The memory you can save or load a file with the USB storage function is any of the internal temporary storage memory, compact flash memory card, and USB flash memory device. For details about how to select a storage device, see section 7.7, Selecting a Storage Device. 2-50

98 T 5A 250V 2.9 Control Function LAN FTP Function This unit can transfer a file to its internal temporary storage memory, mounted compact flash memory card, or USB flash memory device through the PC and Ethernet interface. Operating Conditions Item PC OS File format Operating Conditions PC/AT compatible In conformity with 10BASE-T Windows2000/XP FAT format Connecting Procedures Connect the cables to the connectors on the rear panel as described below. 2 Explanation of Functions PC LAN cable Rear panel of AQ2201 Frame Controller WARNING label PC Nameplate Nameplate LAN cable Rear panel of AQ2202 Frame Controller Note An UPDATE file cannot be transferred using the LAN FTP function. The remote control and USB storage function cannot be used while the file is being transferred using the LAN FTP function. The LAN FTP function cannot be used during remote control or when using the USB storage function. An error may occur in the time count of the measurement operation while the file is being transferred. If the process was terminated forcefully during file transfer, wait about one minute and try to transfer the file again. When removing a storage device after terminating LAN FTP, wait for 15 seconds before removing it. 2-51

99 Chapter 3 Measurement Preparation 3.1 Handling Precautions Frame Controller This is a Class A (IEC61326) instrument. Using it in a domestic environment may cause radio countermeasures. So, appropriate steps must be taken. Do not apply any excessive impact to this unit. Do not operate or store this unit in an environment beyond the specifications. Do not place this unit close to an object that radiates the strong radio wave or magnetic field. When mounting this unit, make sure that sufficient space shown below is provided around it. A fuse is used to protect the unit. If it is blown, disconnect the power cord, and replace the fuse with a new one according to Replacing the Fuses (page 1-21). Do not remove the cover of this unit. When carrying the AQ2202 Frame Controller with modules mounted, make sure this is done by two or more people. 3 Measurement Preparation 100 mm 50 mm 100 mm 50 mm Required Installation Space 3-1

100 3.1 Handling Precautions Module Do not apply any excessive impact to this unit. Do not operate or store this unit in an environment beyond the specifications. Do not place this unit close to an object that radiates the strong radio wave or magnetic field. Do not remove the cover. Do not store or operate this unit in a place where the static electricity is produced. Do not touch any metallic terminal of the connector of the module by hand. 3-2

101 3.2 Connecting the Power Before Connecting the Power Make sure that you observe the following points before connecting the power. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the instrument. WARNING Before connecting the power cord, ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply voltage of the instrument and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord. Check that both the main power switch and power switch of the AQ2201/ AQ2202 are off before connection the power cord. To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire, be sure to use the power cord for the instrument that was supplied by YOKOGAWA. Make sure to perform protective earth grounding to prevent electric shock. Connect the power cord to a three-prong power outlet with a protective earth terminal. Do not use an extension cord without a protective earth ground. Otherwise, the protection function will be compromised. If an AC outlet that conforms to the accessory power cord is unavailable and protective grounding cannot be furnished, do not use the instrument. 3 Measurement Preparation Connecting the Power Cord 1. Check the power switch of the AQ2201/AQ2202 are off. 2. Connect the power cord plug to the power connector on the rear panel. 3. Connect the other end of the cord to an outlet that meets the conditions below. Use the three-prong power outlet equipped with a protective earth terminal. Rated supply voltage** Rated supply voltage frequency Maximum power consumption 100 to 120 VAC/200 ti 240 VAC(automatic switching 50/60 Hz 170 VA(AQ2201), 580VA (AQ2202) (including installed modules) * The AQ2201/AQ2202 can use a 100-V or a 200-V system for the power supply. The maximum rated voltage differs according to the type of power cord. Check that the voltage supplied to the AQ2201/AQ2202 is less than or equal to the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord before using it. Connect this terminal to the earth Adapter Earth pin AC power cord 3-pin plug 3-3

102 3.2 Connecting the Power Replacing the Fuses The power fuses are provided inside the AC LINE connector module on the rear panel of the unit. Replace the power fuses when necessary. 1 Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the power cord. 2 Pull out the fuse holder. 3 Remove both the two fuses and insert recommended fuses. Even if only one fuse has been blown, replace both, since the other might have also been damaged. 4 Push in the fuse holder firmly and connect the power cord. Recommended fuse for AQ2201 Recommended fuse for AQ2202 Time-lag fuse (5 x 20 mm) Rating: 250V, T 5 A (by Littelfuse) Time-lag fuse (5 x 20 mm) Rating: 250V, T 5 A (by Littelfuse) AC LINE connector module Pull out the fuse holder. Fuse holder Fuse Replacement Method of the Power Fuses CAUTION When replacing the fuses, first turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. Replacing the fuses with the power turned ON may cause electric shock, resulting in personal injury. After the fuses have been replaced, make sure before turning ON the power that the power cord is grounded properly and the AC power voltage is correct. Turning ON the power without grounding may cause electric shock, resulting in personal injury. In addition, if the AC power voltage is incorrect, the unit may be damaged internally due to abnormal voltages. 3-4

103 3.3 Mounting/Removing the Module 3 - Measurement Preparation Module mounting slot Module Mounting Slot Onto the module mounting slots of this unit, you can mount 3 modules (in case of AQ2201 Frame Controller) or 9 modules (in case of AQ2202 Frame Controller) at the maximum. Slot No. 1, 2, and 3 are assigned from the left end when viewed from the front. 3-5

104 3.3 Mounting/Removing the Module Mounting the Module 1. Pull up the lever 2 with the button 1 on the module panel kept pressed. 1. Button 2. Lever Note When mounting the module, always check the vertical orientation of the module. 2. Make the dent on the bottom of the module matched with the guide 3 of a desired slot of the frame where the module is to be mounted, and then gradually insert the module. 3 Guide 3. When the module is inserted and it is in contact with the far side, gradually push the lever 2 with strong force until the button 1 clicks. 1. Button 2. Lever 3-6

105 3.3 Mounting/Removing the Module Removing the Module 1. Lightly push up the lever 2 with the button 1 kept pressed until the lever 2 is unlocked. 1. Button 3 2. Lever 2. Gradually pull up the lever 2 until the module is projected approximately 1cm from the frame. Measurement Preparation 2. Lever 3. Gradually pull out the module from the slot of the frame. 3-7

106 3.4 Connecting the Cables Connecting the Optical Sensor Head and Interface Module <Connecting> 1. Insert the cable connector into the panel connector on the interface module (make sure that the guide pin of the panel connector fits into the slot of the cable connector), and then tighten the screw to secure them. Guide Slot Screw 2. Similarly, connect the cable into the connector on the rear panel of the optical sensor head. CAUTION If the interface module is currently mounted in the unit, make sure before connecting it to the optical sensor head that the power is turned OFF or the module is removed from the frame controller. 3-8

107 3.4 Connecting the Cables BER Measurement Connecting the Cables CDR Is Used Through the Electrical IF. The following connections are made when the DUT uses the CDR of the BERT module through the electrical IF. DATA D IN1 (CDR) 3 Coaxial cable DATA OUT CLOCK OUT*1 *2 Phase shifter Coaxial cable Measurement Preparation DATA IN DATA OUT DUT CLOCK IN CLOCK OUT *1: When the DUT needs the CLOCK, the CLOCK OUT terminal is connected. *2: With the phase shifter, the phase is adjusted to a level suitable for the input of the DUT. 3-9

108 3.4 Connecting the Cables CDR Is Not Used Through the Electrical IF. The following connections are made when the DUT does not use the CDR of the BERT module through the electrical IF. DATA OUT DATA IN2 CLOCK OUT*1 CLOCK IN *2 Phase shifter *3 Phase shifter Coaxial cable DATA IN DATA OUT Coaxial cable DUT CLOCK IN CLOCK OUT *1: When the DUT needs the CLOCK, the CLOCK OUT terminal is connected. *2: With the phase shifter, the phase is adjusted to a level suitable for the input of the DUT. *3: Since the CLOCK IN terminal of the ED does not have any phase adjustment function, the phase is adjusted to a level suitable for the input of the ED with the phase shifter. 3-10

109 3.4 Connecting the Cables Optical IF Is Used. The following shows the connections when the DUT has the optical interface and the BERT module (BERT) *1 is operated with it combined with the light source module (LS) *2, light modulation module (EO) *3, and/or optical receiving module (OE) *4 of the AQ2200- series. LS EO U-link (Coaxial)* DATA OUT BERT U-link (Coaxial)* OE 3 LD IN OPT OUT TO OPTICAL MODULATOR DATA IN OPT OUT DATA IN 1(CDR) DATA OUT OPT IN Measurement Preparation PANDA fiber* * Optical ATT Optical fiber OPT IN DUT OPT OUT Optical fiber *1: AQ Gbit/s BERT Module *2: AQ DFB-LD Module *3: AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator (1550 nm) AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator (1310 nm) *4: AQ Gbit/s Optical Receiver * : See Note below. Note To assure the performance, always use EO and OE optional units (sold separately) for the optional U-link and PANDA fiber. To protect the DUT, insert the optical attenuator, when necessary. 3-11

110 3.4 Connecting the Cables External SG Is Used. When using the external SG, make the following connections. For connection with the DUT, see items (1) to (3). Coaxial cable REF CLOCK*1 SG EXT CLOCK*1 *1: When using the REF CLOCK (1/16 or 1/64 of bitrate) of the external SG, connect it to the REF CLOCK IN of the BERT module. When using the EXT CLOCK of the external SG, connect it to the EXT CLOCK IN of the BERT module. Note When using the REF CLOCK, the signal of the external SG must be square waveforms. 3-12

111 3.4 Connecting the Cables Trigger Terminal Is Used. Trigger terminal is used as trigger signal for observation of waveform. When operating an oscilloscope with the trigger terminal used, make the following connections. 3 DATA OUT CLOCK OUT*1 *2 Phase shifter TRIGGER OUT Oscilloscope Measurement Preparation Coaxial cable DATA IN CLOCK IN DUT DATA OUT Coaxial cable *1: When the DUT needs the CLOCK, the CLOCK OUT terminal is connected. *2: With the phase shifter, the phase is adjusted to a level suitable for the input of the DUT. 3-13

112 3.4 Connecting the Cables Trigger terminal is used as reference clock of the optical transceiver. When the trigger terminal is used as reference clock of the optical transceiver, make the following connections. LS *2 EO *3 U-link (Coaxial)* BERT *1 U-link (Coaxial)* OE *4 DATA OUT TO OPTICAL MODULATOR DATA IN 1(CDR) DATA IN DATA OUT LD IN OPT OUT OPT OUT OPT IN PANDA fiber* Optical ATT * TRIGGER OUT Optical ATT * Optical fiber Optical fiber OPT IN OPT OUT REF CLK IN Coaxial cable Optical transceiver Reflected TEST FIXTURE *1: AQ Gbit/s BERT Module *2: AQ DFB-LD Module *3: AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator (1550 nm) AQ Gbit/s Optical Modulator (1310 nm) *4: AQ Gbit/s Optical Receiver * : See Note below. Note To assure the performance, always use EO and OE optional units (sold separately) for the optional U-link and PANDA fiber. To protect the DUT, insert the optical attenuator, when necessary. 3-14

113 3.4 Connecting the Cables Trigger terminal is used as reference clock to synchronize multiple module units. When the trigger terminal is used to synchronize multiple module units, make the following connections. MASTER SLAVE 3 TRIGGER OUT REF CLK IN Measurement Preparation Coaxial cable XFP IF Is Used. When setting the XFP Transceiver as the DUT, the BERT and XFP interface are connected as follows. BERT XFP INTERFACE AQ XFP INTERFACE MODULE XFP Tx Rx REF CLOCK IN (FROM TRIGGER OUT) DATA OUT DATA OUT (TO DATA IN 1) DATA IN DATA IN (FROM DATA OUT) (FROM DATA OUT) U-link (Coaxial) 3-15

114 3.4 Connecting the Cables Connecting the Cables When connecting this unit to the DUT, other module, or measuring instrument with the connection cables, take appropriate measures to protect the unit from static electricity. CAUTION When connecting the cable or terminator to the connector of this unit, always ground it firmly or make the operator in contact with the metallic part of the main frame to prevent static electricity. If the static electricity is charged, this may cause the unit to malfunction. Connector If this unit is not used, attach the terminator to the coaxial connector and protective cap to the optical connector. Before connecting the cable to the connector, always turn OFF the outputs of the signal generator and light source. Tighten the coaxial connector with a torque wrench. The proper tightening torque is 0.9N-m. Excessive torque may cause the connector to break. CAUTION When connecting the U link cable or connection cable to the connector, make the connector of this unit matched with the connector type of the cable end and carry out the proper connection. If a connector other than that specified is connected, this may cause the connector to break. 3-16

115 3.5 Connecting/Disconnecting the Connector Adapter The laser light source (except for DFB-LD) and sensor can be connected to various optical connectors by replacing the connector adapter with an appropriate one. Connecting/Disconnecting the AQ9447 Connector Adapter The AQ9447 Connector Adapter can be used for the AQ Sensor Module. 3 <Connecting> 1. Fit the guide pins of the connector adapter into the guide holes on the rear shell. Guide hole Guide pin Rear shell Measurement Preparation AQ9447 Connector Adapter 2. Push the lever down until a click is heard, to lock the connector adapter. Lever <Disconnecting> 1. Lift the lever to unlock the AQ9447 Connector Adapter. AQ9447 Connector Adapter Lever 2. Pull the lever toward you and remove the connector adapter from the rear shell. Rear shell AQ9447 Connector Adapter 3-17

116 3.5 Connecting/Disconnecting the Connector Adapter Connecting/Disconnecting the AQ9441 Universal Adapter The AQ9441 Connector Adapter can be used for the AQ FP-LD Module and AQ DUAL FP-LD Module. <Connecting> 1. Fit the guide pins of the universal adapter into the guide holes on the rear shell. Take care not to let the connector adapter contact the end of the ferrule that extends from the rear shell. Guide hole Guide pin Rear shell Ferrule AQ9441 Universal Adapter 2. Push the lever down until a click is heard, to lock the connector adapter. Lever <Disconnecting> 1. Lift the lever to unlock the universal adapter. Lever AQ9441 Universal Adapter 2. Pull the lever toward you and pull out the universal adapter from the rear shell slowly. Rear shell AQ9441 Universal Adapter 3-18

117 3.5 Connecting/Disconnecting the Connector Adapter Connecting/Disconnecting the AQ9335C Connector Adapter The AQ9335C connector adapter can be used for the AQ Optical Sensor Head, AQ Optical Sensor Head, AQ Sensor Module and AQ Sensor Module. <Connecting> 1. Fit the guide pin of the rear shell into the guide hole of the connector adapter. 2. Screw in the connector adapter s ring to secure the adapter firmly. 3 <Disconnecting> 1. Turn the ring to remove the connector adapter. Optical sensor head Guide pin Rear shell Guide hole AQ9335C Connector Adapter Measurement Preparation Ring Connecting the Connector Adapter to the Optical Sensor Head Optical sensor module Rear shell AQ9335C Connector Adapter Guide pin Guide hole Ring Connecting the Connector Adapter to the Sensor Module 3-19

118 3.6 Attaching/Removing the Blank Panel AQ Blank Panels can be used to put a blindfold on slots where no measurement module is mounted. <Attaching> 1. Place the blank panel over the desired slot (make sure that the projection on the upper edge of the blank panel fits into the upper edge of the slot). 2. Secure the blank panel by tightening the screw into the screw hole at the bottom of the slot. AQ Blank Panel Secure the blank panel with a screw. 3-20

119 3.7 Connecting the Optical Fiber Cable CAUTION Only connect an angled-physical contact type optical fiber to the ANGLED PC ONLY connector. Other types of connectors can damage the connector s ferrule end. 3 Cleaning the Connector End Face of the Optical Fiber Cable Clean the connector end face of the optical fiber cable under measurement before connecting it to the AQ7270. If dust is adhered to the connector end face, it may damage the optical connector of the AQ7270. If this happens, the AQ7270 will not be able to make correct measurements. 1. Press the connector end face of the optical fiber cable firmly against the cleaning surface of the cleaner. 2. Turn the cable with the end face pressed against the cleaner. 3. Rub the end face against the cleaner. 4. Change the cleaning surface of the cleaner, and repeat steps 1 3. Measurement Preparation Note If you do not press the connector end face of the optical fiber cable firmly against the cleaner, the end face may not be cleaned completely. You can purchase an optical fiber connector cleaner from NTT-AT corporation. 3-21

120 3.8 Basic Operating Changing the Display Screen The following describes how to change each screen. Displaying the SYSTEM Screen To display the SYSTEM screen, press the [SYSTEM] key. Additionally, pressing <Close>will return to the previous screen. Displaying the APPLICATION Screen To display the APPLICATION screen, press the [APPLI] key. Additionally, pressing <Close>will return to the previous screen. Displaying the SUMMARY Screen or DETAIL Screen To display the SUMMARY screen or DETAIL screen, press the [DETAIL] key. Additionally, every time the [DETAIL] key is pressed, the screen is switched between the SUMMARY screen and DETAIL screen. <SUMMARY Screen> <DETAIL Screen> The display screen is switched alternately every time the [DETAIL] key is pressed. 3-22

121 3.8 Basic Operating Changing the Current Module To change the current module, press the [CHAN] key. Every time the [CHAN] key is pressed, the slot No. of the current module is changed, like slot1 -> slot2 -> slot3 -> slot1.... At this time, the slot where no module is mounted is skipped. Additionally, when the SUMMARY screen is displayed, the current module is changed with the cursor key. <SUMMARY Screen> 3 Measurement Preparation Every time the [CHAN] key is pressed, the current module is changed in the order of slot No. 3-23

122 3.8 Basic Operating <DETAIL Screen> Every time the [CHAN] key is pressed, the current module is changed in the order of slot No. 3-24

123 3.8 Basic Operating Selecting a Parameter and Changing the Numeric Value The following describes how to select various parameters and how to change the numeric value. Selecting a Parameter Two kinds of parameter selections are provided as shown below. <Selection with the Cursor> Move the cursor to a parameter you want to change, and then press the [ENTER] key or <OK>. <Selection with the Function Key> Press relevant function key, on which a parameter you want to change is displayed. Canceling the Contents of the Parameter during Setting To cancel the contents of the parameter you are currently setting, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. Changing the Numeric Value Two kinds of numeric value changing methods are provided as shown below. <Inputting a Numeric Value with the Cursor Key> 3 Measurement Preparation 1. With the cursor key (, ), move the cursor to a digit you want to change the numeric value. 2. Increase or decrease the numeric value with the cursor key (, ). It is also possible to continuously increase or decrease the numeric value by keeping the key pressed for a while. 3. Repeat above steps 1 and 2 to change the numeric value to a value you want to input. 4. Press the [ENTER] key or <OK> to set the numeric value you have input. Note The value input is automatically limited so that it does not exceed the upper or lower limit value. <Inputting a Numeric Value with the Ten-key Pad> 1. Press the [SHIFT] key. If it is possible to input a numeric value, SHIFT is shown at the upper right portion of the screen as shown in the Fig. below. 2. Input a numeric value directly. To correct the value, use the cursor key ( ) as back space (BS) key. 3. Press the [ENTER] key or <OK> to set the numeric value you have input. When inputting a numeric value with the ten-key pad, SHIFT is shown at the upper right portion of the screen. Screen for Value Input through Ten-key Pad Note When pressing the cursor key while inputting a value with the ten-key pad, the input mode is automatically changed to the cursor input mode. If the value you have set exceeds the upper or lower limit value when pressing the [ENTER] key or <OK>, it is automatically corrected to the upper or lower limit value. 3-25

124 3.8 Basic Operating Returning the Parameter Display to the Top To return the parameter display, which has been moved to the lower layer by selecting the parameter, press the [DISP TOP] key. Pressing the [DISP TOP] key will return the parameter display to the top at once. Note In the status waiting for the ten-key pad input (Screen for Value Input through Ten-key Pad, page 3-29), pressing the [DISP TOP] key will input the numeric value 2. In this case, press the [SHIFT] key to cancel the status waiting for the ten-key pad input, and then press the [DISP TOP] key. 3-26

125 3.8 Basic Operating Returning Various Parameters to Their Initial Values Press the [PRESET] key. The pop screen to select the Preset items will appear. Select the items you want to initialize and press the [ENTER] or <OK> key. The selected items will be initialized. You can specify the Preset items from among [Main Frame] (initializes the frame only), [All Modules] (initializes all the mounted modules), and [All] (initializes the frame and all the mounted modules). During execution of initialization, the message Executing will appear. For details about initial values, see List of Default Settings (page 11-14). 1. Press the [PRESET] key. The popup screen allowing you to select an initialization item will appear as shown in the Fig. below. 3 Measurement Preparation 2. With the cursor key, move the cursor to an item you want to initialize. Press the <OK> or [ENTER] key to execute the initialization. For initialization item, select any of three items shown below. [Main Frame]: Initializes the parameters of the frame controller. [All Modules]: Initializes the parameters of all mounted modules. [All]: Initializes the parameters of the frame controller and all mounted modules. The following popup screen is displayed while the initialization is being executed. For details about initial values, see List of Default Settings, (page 11-4). 3-27

126 3.8 Basic Operating Inputting a Character String For file name and display module name, etc., up to 31 characters can be input using the following procedures. Character string currently being input Input cursor Character selection cursor Character template <OK>: Sets the character string currently being input to complete the character string input. <Cancel>: Cancels the character string input. < >,< >: Moves the input cursor. <Back Space>: Deletes the character before the input cursor. Cursor key: Moves the character selection cursor. Ten-key pad: Inputs a numeric value directly at the input cursor position. [ENTER] key: Inputs the character at the character selection cursor position to the input cursor position. [CANCEL] key: Deletes the character before the input cursor. Canceling the Remote Control In some operations during GP-IB remote control or LAN remote control, only <Local> is shown on the function key as shown in Figure. The panel operation cannot be performed while <Local> is being displayed. To start the panel operation, press <Local> or <LAN Local> to cancel the remote control. Remote Control Status 3-28

127 3.8 Basic Operating Various Kinds of Information Necessary information you must check or observe will appear on the popup screen. Follow the instruction that appears on the popup screen to perform the operation or check. Error Message and Confirmation the Error If an error occurs, this error and its contents are informed. In this case, check the display carefully. After removing the cause of the error, press <OK>. If the cause of the error cannot be solved, the same error appears again even after pressing <OK>. Additionally, pressing the cursor key allows you to check the error log. For details about error messages, see section 12.2, Error Messages. (Example) Module operation error Caution Message Operations particularly not allowed to take are informed. Check the display carefully and follow the instruction to perform the operation. If you do not follow the instruction, this may cause the unit to break. Additionally, note that this popup screen will disappear automatically. 3 Measurement Preparation (Example) Caution information about operation of CF when saving data Confirmation Message This confirmation message is shown when it is predicted that the settings cannot be restored if the current operation is executed. After checking the message, to continue the operation, click <OK>. On the contrary, to stop the operation, click <Cancel>. (Example) Conformation of data deletion when operating a file saved in the CF. 3-29

128 Chapter 4 Optical Power Measurement 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module By mounting AQ , AQ , AQ AQ , AQ AQ , or AQ on this unit, you can measure the optical power. AQ Sensor Module AQ Sensor Module AQ Interface Module + AQ Optical Sensor Head AQ Interface Module + AQ Optical Sensor Head AQ Sensor Module In the following descriptions, the operation screens of the AQ are used to explain the contents. To operate the AQ sensor module, follow the steps below. 4 <Operation Screen of AQ Sensor Module> D1 : Device 1 (OPT IN1) D2 : Device 2 (OPT IN2) Optical Power Measurement SUMMARY Screen D1 : Device 1 (OPT IN1) D2 : Device 2 (OPT IN2) DETAIL Screen 4-1

129 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 1. When the function setup popup screen appears, <Device Select> is shown. 2. Press <Device Select>. Every time <Device Select> is pressed, the device you can set up is changed. Toggles through Device 1 -> Device 2 -> Device 1&2 -> Note that the same setting cannot be entered for multiple devices. In the case of parameters (example: Output Trig), toggles between Device 1 -> Device 2... Operation Screen of AQ Sensor Module Soft Key Menu Name MaxMinReset DRef Measure Mode Avg RefMode Ref Cal Wavelength DataPoint Unit DispReso Range Mod Zero ZeroAll AnalogOutput OutputTrig Menu Function Resets the Max/Min measurement results Sets the currently displayed measurement value to the reference value. Selects the measurement mode(normal/single/trigger) Sets the Averaging time Selects a comparison object for the relative measurement Sets the reference value Sets the offset value Sets the wavelength value Sets the number of data points of the Max/Min measurement Selects the Power Display Unit Selects the Number of Power Display Digits Selects the measurement range Selects the moduletion mode Executes the ZERO-SET of currently module Executes the ZERO-SET of all installed sensor modules and AQ ATTN modules. Selects the analog output mode Selects the trigger output on/off setting Information 4-2

130 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Changing the Power Display Unit The power display unit is changed to dbm, db, W(abs), or W(rel). dbm and W show the absolute value while db and W(rel) show the relative value. Additionally, the power display unit has the following relationship. PdBm = 10 x log (Pinput(W)/1x10-3 (W)) where PdBm: Optical input power (dbm) Pinput: Optical input power (W) Furthermore, the display values have the following relationship. PdBdisplay(dBm) = PdBm (dbm) + CAL (db) Pwdisplay (W) = 10 PdBdisplay (dbm) /10 x 10-3 PdB = PdBdisplay (dbm) PdBref (dbm) Pw = Pwdisplay (W)/Pwref (W) where PdBm: Measurement value (dbm) when set at dbm. PdBdisplay: Measurement display value (dbm) when set at "dbm". Pwdisplay: Measurement display value (W) when set at W(abs). PdB: Measurement display value (db) when set at db. Pw: Measurement display value (no unit) when set at W(rel). CAL: Power offset value (db) PdBref: Relative reference value (dbm) Pwref: Relative reference value (W) 4 Optical Power Measurement Note The power offset value is the offset value set in Setting the Power Offset Value. For details, see Setting a Power Offset Value (page 4-5). The relative reference value is the value shown in Reference. For details, see Setting the Reference Mode (page 4-6) and Setting a Reference Value (page 4-7). 4-3

131 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Unit> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Power and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Unit popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired display unit and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4-4

132 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Setting a Power Offset Value You can use a value, that a power offset value ( to db) is added to the measurement value, as the display value. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Cal> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Calibration and press the [ENTER] key The Calibration popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. At this time, when changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is then set immediately and it affects the displayed measurement value quickly. Optical Power Measurement When setting the power offset value, Cal will appear. Note The setting range is to db. 4-5

133 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Setting the Reference Mode You can set a comparison object for the relative measurement. When the display unit is set to db or W (rel), the relative measurement value is displayed in the Power display field. Value setting: x-y-z setting: Relative measurement to desired reference value (dbm or W) set in <Reference> Relative measurement to the value measured by the specified sensor x: Frame No. ( 0 ) y: Slot No. z: Device No. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Ref Mode> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Ref Mode and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Ref Mode popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Value or x-y-z and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4-6

134 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 5. When selecting x-y-z, the x-y-z popup screen will appear. Sensors used for the relative measurement are listed. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired sensor for the relative measurement and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4 Note When setting the reference mode, the relative measurement reference value is shown in the Reference field. Value is set.: Reference value set in <Reference>. x-y-z is set.: Measurement value of the sensor specified for the relative measurement. Setting a Reference Value You can set a reference value when the reverence mode is set at Value. Two kinds of reference value settings are provided as shown below. Use an optimal setting corresponding to the application. A desired value is input. The currently displayed measurement value is used for the reference value. Optical Power Measurement <Inputting a Desired Value> 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Ref> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Reference and press the [ENTER] key. 4-7

135 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 4. The Reference popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Additionally, to change the unit when the measurement display is W (abs) or W(rel), see steps 5 and Press <Unit>. 6. The Unit popup screen will appear. Move the cursor to using the cursor key a desired display unit and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4-8

136 <Using the Currently Displayed Measurement Value for the Reference Value> 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <D Ref>. 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 4 Operation Screen of AQ Operation Screen of AQ When the AQ sensor module is mounted, press <DRef1> and <DRef2> for the device 1 and device 2, respectively. 4. The current measurement value is shown in the Reference field. Optical Power Measurement The current measurement value Note At this time, when setting a reference value, the reference mode is automatically changed to value. For details, see Setting the Reference Mode (page 4-6). 4-9

137 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Changing the Number of Power Display Digits The power up to 1/10, 1/100, 1/1000, or 1/10000 decimal place can be displayed. Select the necessary number of decimal places. Note that the value at the least significant decimal place is made by rounding the value at the most significant decimal place that is not displayed. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Disp Reso> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Disp Reso and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Disp Reso popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired number of decimal places and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. For units of W, the decimal point can move within the five valid number of digits, therefore there are times when the actual displayed digits are not the same as the specified digits. 4-10

138 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Changing the Measurement Wavelength The optical input element has the wavelength sensitivity distribution. By setting the wavelength of the measurement light, the wavelength correction function of the sensor functions correctly to accurately measure the optical power. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Wavelength> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Wavelength and press the [ENTER] key The Wavelength popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value using any of two operating procedures shown below and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Optical Power Measurement <Changing the Numeric Value with the Ten-key Pad or the Cursor Key> Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key. 4-11

139 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module <Changing the Numeric Value with the Function Key <Typical>> Press <Typical> repeatedly to sequentially change the wavelength typical value. Note The setting range may vary depending on the model of the sensor. The following shows the typical values to be selected with <Typical>. AQ Sensor: nm, nm, nm, nm AQ Sensor: nm, nm, nm AQ Sensor: nm, nm, nm, nm AQ Sensor Head: nm, nm, nm, nm AQ Sensor Head: nm 4-12

140 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Changing the Measurement Mode Three kinds of measurement modes are provided. 1 Normal: Measurement is always performed to update the measurement value at any time. 2 Single: Measurement is performed once and the measurement value is updated after completion of the measurement. 3 Input Trigger: Measurement is performed by the trigger input and the measurement value is updated after completion of the measurement. Select an optimal measurement mode corresponding to the measurement application. Note For details about how to input the trigger, see section 11.1 in the IM E. The measurement restart is accepted even while the measurement is running in the Single mode or Input Trigger mode. The measurement is performed only once in the Single mode or Input Trigger mode. After that, the measurement is not started until the Normal mode or Single mode is started or the trigger is input. When Input Trigger is set for both the device 1 and device 2 in the AQ , the average time setting is changed to a time longer than the value, which has already been set for the device 1 or device 2. Additionally, if the averaging time is changed in this status, the time settings of both the device 1 and device 2 are also changed. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 4 Optical Power Measurement 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Meas Mode> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Meas Mode and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Meas Mode popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired measurement mode and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The measurement is then started to update the measurement data in the Power field. 4-13

141 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Changing the Averaging Time The data of the time set in this section is averaged to one measurement data. Note that the allowable averaging time may vary depending on the modulation setting. Averaging Time by Modulation Setting Averaging time CW setting CHOP setting 100 ms Yes ms Yes ms Yes - 1 ms Yes - 2 ms Yes - 5 ms Yes - 10 ms Yes - 20 ms Yes - 50 ms Yes Yes 100 ms Yes Yes 200 ms Yes Yes 500 ms Yes Yes 1 s Yes Yes 2 s Yes Yes 5 s Yes v 10 s Yes Yes Note The AQ sensor module uses only CW setting and its setting range is 200 ms to 10 s. For the AQ Sensor Module, only for CW, the selectable range is 100 ms 10 s. When switching from CW mode to CHOP mode, if the averaging time is invalid in chop mode (e.g. 100 ms 20 ms), the averaging time is automatically set to 50 ms. When setting the averaging time to 100 ms 50 ms, if MaxMin mode is set to Window, the averaging time automatically sets to 100 ms. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Avg> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Average and press the [ENTER] key. 4-14

142 4. The Average popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired averaging time and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 4 Displaying the Maximum Value and Minimum Value of the Measurement Value The following four kinds of modes (Max/Min modes) can be set for totaling of the maximum value and minimum value. Additionally, MAX (maximum value), MIN (minimum value), and Difference (maximum value - minimum value) can be checked on the DETAIL screen. Optical Power Measurement 1. Continuous: The maximum value, minimum value, and (maximum value - minimum value) are updated every time the measurement value is updated between the mode setting and mode OFF. Measurement value Meas 1 Meas 2 Meas 3 Meas N Measurement is Max/Min Update Max/Min Update Max/Min Update Max/Min Update continued. Max/Min Update 4-15

143 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Date Points:N Measurement value Meas 1 2. Window: The maximum value, minimum value, and (maximum value - minimum value) are calculated from the measurement values of sample quantity specified in Data Points. For data, the latest measurement value is taken to update the measurement value while disposing of the oldest measurement value. Meas 2 Meas 3 Meas N Meas N+1 Meas N+2 Max/Min values are updated in this area. Max/Min values are updated in this area. Max/Min values are updated in this area. Measurement is stopped. 3. Refresh: This is the same as in Continuous mode, but after measuring the number of samples specified under Data Points, measurement stops. Measurement value Date Points:N Meas 1 Meas 2 Meas 3 Meas N Max/Min Update Max/Min Update Max/Min Update Max/Min Update Measurement is stopped. Max/Min Update 4. Off: The modes set in 1 to 3 are turned OFF. Unless OFF is set, the modes set in 1 to 3 cannot be cancelled. Note The Normal measurement of the Meas Mode cannot be executed as long as the Refresh mode is set. Set Normal of Meas Mode after the Max/Min mode has been set to OFF. For details about the number of Data Points, see Setting the Number of Data Points (page 4-19). 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <MaxMin Mode> or move the cursor using the cursor key to MaxMin Mode and press the [ENTER] key. 4-16

144 4. The MaxMin Mode popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired mode and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. When pressing <MaxMin Reset>, Max, Min, and Difference are cleared, and then the measurement is started again (restarted). 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 4 <Clearing the Values during Measurement of Max/Min Values> When pressing <MaxMin Reset>, Max, Min, and Difference are cleared, and then the measurement is started again (restarted). Optical Power Measurement The current values are shown in the Maximum and Minimum fields, and then the value in the Difference field is cleared. 4-17

145 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Setting the Number of Data Points The number of measurement data points (1 to 20,000) to be used in the Window mode and Refresh mode of the Max/Min measurement can be set for the data points. Follow the steps below to set the number of data points. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Data Points> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Data Points and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Data Points popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note For AQ , the number of data points setting becomes 1 to 10,

146 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Changing the Measurement Range The measurement range can be set in steps of 10dB. A measurement range can be selected from two modes described below. 1. AUTO range: An optimal range is set automatically corresponding to the input optical power. Normally, this mode is used. 2. HOLD range: A measurement range can be set manually. Note The measurement range currently being measured in the AUTO range mode is shown in brackets next to the AUTO in the Range field on the screen. When using the HOLD range, pay special attention so that the optical input power must be within the range during operation. The optical input power status within the range can be checked through the range bar. The range bar shows the currently input power graphically. The left end shows the lower limit of the range while the right end shows the upper limit. Additionally, if the measurement display value is shown in orange, this shows the measurement range-over. If it is shown in dark brown, this shows the measurement range-under. An optimal measurement range is selected so that the measurement value is shown in black, that is, normal color. 4 Optical Power Measurement Range bar Range Bar on DETAIL Screen 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Range> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Range and press the [ENTER] key. 4-19

147 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 4. The Range popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired mode and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. If HOLD is selected, a list of available ranges pops up. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired range and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4-20

148 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Changing the Modulation Mode (CW/CHOP) To accurately measure the optical power, you must set the modulation mode corresponding to that of the optical input. For the modulation mode, the CW light or CHOP (50%DUTY) modulation light can be selected. Additionally, select an optimal CHOP modulation light from 270 Hz, 1 khz, or 2 khz. Two kinds of modulation mode setting methods are provided. Select a desired setting method corresponding to the application. <Setting through the Panel of the Sensor Module> Press the [CW CHOP] key on the sensor panel to change CW/CHOP (270 Hz). <Setting through the Panel of the Frame Controller> 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Mod> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Modulation and press the [ENTER] key. 4 Optical Power Measurement 4. The Modulation popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired mode and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Additionally, when CHOP is set, the LED on the sensor panel is lit. Note If the CW light is received in the CHOP modulation light mode, the modulation mode error occurs. Make the setting of the modulation corresponding to the optical input. The AQ sensor module is not applicable to the CHOP light. The AQ Sensor Module does not support CHOP light. A mode error occurs if the chop modulation light mode frequency is not suitable. Enter modulation settings that correspond to the optical input. 4-21

149 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Starting the ZERO-SET When performing the ZERO-SET, the electrical offset inside the sensor is adjusted, allowing you to accurately measure the absolute value. Two kinds of ZERO-SET modes are provided as described below. Select a desired mode to execute the ZERO-SET corresponding to your need. Zero : Zero ALL : Starts the ZERO-SET of the current module. Perform a ZERO-SET of all installed sensor modules and AQ ATTN modules. <Setting through the Panel of the Sensor Module> 1. Firmly mount the optical shield cap on the optical receiving connector on the sensor you want to perform the ZERO-SET. 2. Press the [ZERO] key on the sensor panel to start the ZERO-SET. The following screen appears while the ZERO-SET is being performed. Note When pressing the [ZERO] key before the ZERO-SET is completed, the ZERO-SET is aborted. 3. When the ZERO-SET is completed, the screen is returned to the previous screen. <Setting through the Panel of the Frame Controller (Other than AQ Module> 1. Firmly mount the optical shield cap on the optical receiving connector on the sensor you want to perform the ZERO-SET. 2. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 3. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 4. Press either <Zero> or <Zero All> to start the ZERO-SET. When the ZERO-SET is completed, the screen is returned to the previous screen. 4-22

150 <Setting through the Panel of the Frame Controller (AQ Sensor Module> 1. Firmly mount the optical shield cap on the optical receiving connector on the sensor you want to perform the ZERO-SET. 2. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 3. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 4. Press either <Zero> or <Zero All>. The Zero Set Device popup screen will appear. 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 4 5. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a device you want to perform the ZERO- SET, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The ZERO-SET is started. When the ZERO-SET is completed, the screen is returned to the previous screen. Optical Power Measurement Note If the optical interruption is insufficient, the error screen as shown in Fig. 4-3 will appear. If this occurs, perform the optical interruption firmly and restart the ZERO-SET. When pressing <Cancel> before the ZERO-SET operation is not completed, the ZERO-SET operation is aborted. ZERO-SET Error Screen 4-23

151 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module Setting the Analog Output The analog output function outputs voltages from the analog output terminal on the front panel according to the analog output mode. This enables analog output that corresponds to the input optical power in real time (voltage output of approximately 0 2 V). The following three modes are available for analog output. Select the mode most suitable for your application. AUTO mode: For outputting voltages of approximately 0 to 2 V for each individual measuring range. MANUAL mode LINEAR mode: For setting the maximum level (power level setting for outputting the analog output maximum value: typical maximum range value + 3 dbm typical minimum range value + 3 dbm (in steps of 0.1 db)) and power range (power range for analog output: 3 24 db (in 3 db steps)), and outputting voltages of approximately 0 2 V in proportion to optical power (W) falling within a specified range. LOG mode: For setting the maximum level (power level setting for outputting the analog output maximum value: typical maximum range value + 3 dbm typical minimum range value + 3 dbm (in steps of 0.1 db)) and power range (power range for analog output: 3 60 db (in 1 db steps)), and outputting voltages of approximately 0 2 V in proportion to optical power (db) falling within a specified range. Examples of Analog Output in AUTO Mode and MANUAL Mode 2 Analog output (V) AUTO mode LINEAR mode LOG mode MANUAL mode settings Maximum Level:+ 0 dbm Power Range: 24 db Optical power (mw) 4-24

152 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Analog Output> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Analog Out and press the [ENTER] key The Analog Out popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired mode and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Optical Power Measurement 5. When specifying the Linear mode or Log mode, the popup screen for selection of Maximum Level and Power Range will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired item and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4-25

153 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module 6. The Maximum Level or Power Range popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. <Maximum Level Popup Screen> <Power Range Popup Screen> 7. When the input is completed, press <Close> to complete the input. Note For details about how to connect the analog output, see Sensor Analog Output Connector (page 2-13). The AQ sensor module is not applicable to the Analog Out function. 4-26

154 Holding the Sensor Measurement Value Display You can stop the measurement data display update. With this function, you can check this measurement data record. Additionally, even though the display update is stopped, the measurement is continued in the Normal mode. 1. Press the [HOLD] key. HOLD is shown at the upper right portion of the screen while the display update is being stopped. To restart the display update, press the [HOLD] key again. 4.1 Power Measurement by Optical Sensor Module HOLD is shown while the display update is being stopped. 4 Note On the SUMMARY screen of the AQ2202 Frame Controller, the slot No. tab is displayed in red instead of HOLD indication. Optical Power Measurement This portion is shown in red. 4-27

155 Chapter 5 Optical Output 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module Soft Key Menu Name Power Unit Opt WL/Freq Att ModSrc ModFrq LineWidth WLOffset PLOffset Menu Function Sets the Output power level value Selects the Wavelength display unit Selects the Laser output on/off setting Sets the output wavelength Sets the attenuating the Laser output Selects the modulating the Laser output Selects the modulation frequency Selects the Laser line width Sets the Wavelength offset value Sets the Output power level value Information 5 Turning ON/OFF the Laser Output To turn ON or OFF the laser output, two setting methods are provided. Select a desired setting method corresponding to the application. Follow the steps below to turn ON or OFF the laser output. Additionally, as the laser output is turned ON, the LED on the light source panel will be lit. Optical Output <Setting through the Panel of the Light Source Module> Press the [OPT] key on the light source panel to switch the light source between ON and OFF. <Setting through the Panel of the Frame Controller> 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Opt> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Opt and press the [ENTER] key. 5-1

156 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module 4. The Opt popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of ON or OFF and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note When LOCK is shown in the Opt field, the laser output cannot be started. When starting the output, check the following two points. 1 Interlock connector is open. -> Short-circuit the interlock connector with the short-circuit pin. 2 Laser output is locked. -> Follow the steps stated in Locking the Laser Output (section 11.3) to unlock it. Outputting the Laser Beam with the Set Power With the AQ , you can output the laser beam by specifying an absolute power value. The following shows the relationship among the laser beam output power, attenuation amount, and power offset value. Pdisplay (dbm) = Pdefault (dbm) - ATTN(dB) + Poffset (db) where Pdisplay: Output power display value (dbm) Pdefault: Maximum output power at shipment (dbm) ATTN: Attenuation amount (db) (See Attenuating the Laser Output (page 5-4).) Poffset: Power offset value (db) (See Changing the Offset of the Display Output Power (page 5-5).) Note The connector connection status, environment, and/or secular change may affect the Pdefault. Therefore, the values set in Pdisplay are not guaranteed. These values are used as reference. 5-2

157 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Power> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Power and press the [ENTER] key The Power popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. At this time, when changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set immediately. Optical Output Note Even if the unit of power is W, power settings are in units of dbm. 5-3

158 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module Attenuating the Laser Output You can attenuate the laser output (0 to db). 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Att> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Attenuation and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Attenuation popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. At this time, when changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set immediately. 5-4

159 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module Changing the Offset of the Display Output Power You can use a value, that a power offset value ( to db) is added to the output power, as power display value. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <PL Offset> or move the cursor using the cursor key to PL Offset and press the [ENTER] key The PL Offset popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Optical Output 5-5

160 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module Changing the Wavelength You can change the laser output wavelength within a width of approximately 1.6 nm in steps of 1/1000 nm. The display wavelength has the following relationship. λ display (nm) = λ output (nm) + λ cal (nm) λ display (nm) x 10-9 = C/(f(THz) x ) where C: Light velocity in vacuum ( x 108 m/s) λ display: Display wavelength (nm) λ output: Output wavelength (nm) λ cal: Wavelength offset value (nm) f: Display frequency (THz) Note For details about λ cal, see Changing the Wavelength Offset (page 5-7). The currently set wavelength position to the allowable wavelength setting range can be checked using the wavelength bar on the DETAIL screen. This data is used as reference of the wavelength setting. Wavelength bar 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <WL/Freq> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Wavelength and press the [ENTER] key. 5-6

161 4. The Wavelength popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module Changing the Wavelength Offset You can display a wavelength value that a wavelength offset value (ranging from nm to nm) is added to the output wavelength. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <WL Offset> or move the cursor using the cursor key to WL Offset and press the [ENTER] key. 5 Optical Output 4. The WL Offset popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Even if the unit of wavelength is THz, the wavelength offset is set in units of nm. 5-7

162 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module Modulating the Laser Output You can perform the CW or CHOP (50%DUTY) modulation of the optical output. For CHOP modulation, 270 Hz, 1 khz, 2 khz, or desired frequency (0.1 to khz) can be set. For details about how to set the modulation frequency, see Changing the Modulation Frequency (page 5-9). Two kinds of modulation mode settings are provided. Select a desired setting corresponding to the application. Note The absolute value power display shows the power level of the peak value in the CHOP modulation. If no external modulation option is mounted, External CHOP and External SINE are not displayed. <Setting through the Panel of the Light Source Module> Press the [CW/CHOP] key on the light source panel to switch between CW and CHOP. When changing to the CHOP modulation, the LED is lit and Internal is shown in Mod Source on the screen. <Setting through the Panel of the Frame Controller> 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Mod Src> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Mod Source and press the [ENTER] key. 5-8

163 4. The Mod Source popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to OFF (for CW) or Internal (for CHOP) and press the [ENTER] key. 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module Note If the external modulation option is installed, you can select External CHOP or External SINE. Changing the Modulation Frequency 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 5 Optical Output 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Mod Frq> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Mod Freq and press the [ENTER] key. 5-9

164 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module 4. The Mod Freq popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired frequency and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. To set a frequency freely (in the range between 0.1 and khz), select Optional. Note If Mod Source has been set to Internal, you can set the modulation frequency. 5. When selecting Optional, follow the steps below. The Optional popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5-10

165 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module Changing the Laser Line Width You can select a desired laser line width from two kinds of selections, Narrow and Wide. To minimize the effects of reflection-induced interference, you can stabilize power measurements by selecting a laser line width of Wide. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Linewidth> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Linewidth and press the [ENTER] key The Linewidth popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to the line width more suitable for the purpose and press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output 5-11

166 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module Changing the Wavelength Display Unit You can switch the display unit between the wavelength display and frequency display. The following calculation formula shows the relationship between the wavelength and frequency. λ display (nm) x 10-9 = C/(fdisplay(THz) x ) where λ display: Display wavelength (nm) fdisplay: Display frequency (THz) C: Light velocity in vacuum ( x 108 m/s) 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Unit>. 4. The Unit popup screen will appear. Move the cursor usint the cursor key to Wavelength and press the [ENTER] key. 5. The Unit popup screen will reappear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of nm (wavelength display) or THz (frequency display) and press the [ENTER] key. 5-12

167 Changing the Power Display Unit You can switch the power display unit between the dbm display and W display. PdBm = 10logPw Pw: Optical power (mw) PdBm: Optical power (dbm) 5.1 Optical Output by DFB-LD Light Source Module 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Unit>. 5 Optical Output 4. The Unit popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Power and press the [ENTER] key. 5. The Unit popup screen will reappear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of dbm or W and press the [ENTER] key. 5-13

168 5.2 Optical Output by FP-LD Light Source Module Soft Key Menu Name Power PLOffset Unit Opt Att ModSrc Menu Function Sets the Output power level value Sets the Output power offset value Selects the Wavelength display unit Selects the Laser output on/off setting Sets the attenuating the Laser output Selects the modulation frequency Information Turning ON/OFF the Laser Output To turn ON or OFF the laser output, two setting methods are provided. Select a desired setting method corresponding to the application. Follow the steps below to turn ON or OFF the laser output. Additionally, as the laser output is turned ON, the LED on the light source panel will be lit. <Setting through the Panel of the Light Source Module> Press the [OPT] key on the light source panel to switch the light source between ON and OFF. <Setting through the Panel of the Frame Controller> 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Opt> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Opt and press the [ENTER] key. 5-14

169 4. The Opt popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of ON or OFF and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5.2 Optical Output by FP-LD Light Source Module Note When LOCK is shown in the Opt field, the laser output cannot be started. When starting the output, check the following two points. 1 Interlock connector is open. -> Short-circuit the interlock connector with the short-circuit pin. 2 Laser output is locked. -> Follow the steps stated in Locking the Laser Output (section 11.3) to unlock it. 5 Optical Output 5-15

170 5.2 Optical Output by FP-LD Light Source Module Outputting the Laser Beam with the Set Power With the AQ , you can output the laser beam by specifying an absolute power value. The following shows the relationship among the laser beam output power, attenuation amount, and power offset value. Pdisplay (dbm) = Pdefault (dbm) - ATTN (db) + Poffset (db) where Pdisplay: Output power display value (dbm) Pdefault: Maximum output power at shipment (dbm) ATTN: Attenuation amount (db) (See Attenuating the Laser Output (page 5-16).) Poffset: Power offset value (db) (See Changing the Offset of the Display Output Power (page 5-17).) Note The environment and/or secular change may affect the Pdefault. Therefore, the values set in Pdisplay are not guaranteed. These values are used as reference. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Power> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Power and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Power popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note Even if the unit of power is W, power settings are in units of dbm. 5-16

171 Attenuating the Laser Output You can attenuate the laser output (0 to 6.00 db). 5.2 Optical Output by FP-LD Light Source Module 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Att> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Attenuation and press the [ENTER] key The Attenuation popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. At this time, when changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set immediately. Optical Output 5-17

172 5.2 Optical Output by FP-LD Light Source Module Changing the Offset of the Display Output Power You can use a value, that a power offset value ( to db) is added to the output power, as power display value. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <PL Offset> or move the cursor using the cursor key to PL Offset and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The PL Offset popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5-18

173 5.2 Optical Output by FP-LD Light Source Module Modulating the Laser Output You can perform the CW or CHOP (50%DUTY) modulation of the optical output. For CHOP modulation, 270 Hz, 1 khz, or 2 khz can be set. For details about how to set the modulation frequency, see Changing the Modulation Frequency (page 5-18). Two kinds of modulation mode settings are provided. Select a desired setting corresponding to the application. Note The absolute value power display shows the power level of the peak value in the CHOP modulation. <Setting through the Panel of the Light Source Module> Press the [CW/CHOP] key on the light source panel to switch between CW and CHOP. When changing to the CHOP modulation, the LED is lit and Internal is shown in Mod Source on the screen Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Mod Src> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Mod Source and press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output 4. The Mod Source popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to OFF (for CW) or Internal (for CHOP) and press the [ENTER] key. 5-19

174 5.2 Optical Output by FP-LD Light Source Module Changing the Modulation Frequency 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. Note If Mod Source has been set to Internal, you can set the modulation frequency. 3. Press <Mod Frq> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Mod Freq and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Mod Freq popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired frequency and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Changing the Wavelength Display Unit You can switch the display unit between the wavelength display and frequency display. The following calculation formula shows the relationship between the wavelength and frequency. λ display (nm) x 10-9 = C/(fdisplay(THz) x ) where λ display: Display wavelength (nm) fdisplay: Display frequency (THz) C: Light velocity in vacuum ( x 108 m/s) 5-20

175 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Unit>. 5.2 Optical Output by FP-LD Light Source Module 4. The Unit popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Wavelength and press the [ENTER] key. 5 Optical Output 5. The Unit popup screen will reappear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of nm (wavelength display) or THz (frequency display) and press the [ENTER] key. 5-21

176 5.2 Optical Output by FP-LD Light Source Module Changing the Power Display Unit You can switch the power display unit between the dbm display and W display. PdBm = 10logPw Pw: Optical power (mw) PdBm: Optical power (dbm) 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Unit>. 4. The Unit popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Power and press the [ENTER] key. 5. The Unit popup screen will reappear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of dbm or W and press the [ENTER] key. 5-22

177 5.3 Optical Output by DUAL FP-LD Light Source Module FP-LD light sources with wavelengths of 1310 nm and 1550 nm are built-into the AQ Therefore, 1310 nm- or 1550 nm-laser can be output individually or laser having both 1310 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths can also be output. Additionally, in this module, Opt1/Opt2, WL1/WL2, ATT1/ATT2, Power1/Power2, and PL Offset1/PL Offset2, etc. mean the laser light source1/laser light source 2. The laser light source1 shows the FP-LD light source with a wavelength of 1310 nm while the laser light source2 shows the FP-LD light source with a wavelength of 1550 nm. Soft Key Menu Name Power PLOffset Unit Opt Att ModSrc Menu Function Sets the Output power level value Sets the Output power offset value Selects the Wavelength display unit Selects the Laser output on/off setting Sets the attenuating the Laser output Selects the modulation frequency Information 5 Optical Output Turning ON/OFF the Laser Output To turn ON or OFF the laser output, two setting methods are provided. Select a desired setting method corresponding to the application. Follow the steps below to turn ON or OFF the laser output. Additionally, as the laser output is turned ON, the LED on the light source panel will be lit. <Setting through the Panel of the Light Source Module> Every time the [OPT] key on the light source panel is pressed, the laser output is changed in order, like OFF -> 1310 nm laser ON -> 1550 nm laser ON -> 1310 nm/1550 nm laser ON. <Setting through the Panel of the Frame Controller> 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. Then select a light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Press <Opt>. 5-23

178 5.3 Optical Output by DUAL FP-LD Light Source Module 3. The Opt popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a laser light source, from which the laser is output, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note When LOCK is shown in the Opt field, the laser output cannot be started. When starting the output, check the following two points. 1 Interlock connector is open. -> Short-circuit the interlock connector with the short-circuit pin. 2 Laser output is locked. -> Follow the steps stated in Locking the Laser Output (section 11.3) to unlock it. Outputting the Laser Beam with the Set Power With the AQ , you can output the laser beam by specifying an absolute power value, Power1 (1310 nm) or Power2 (1550 nm). The following shows the relationship among the laser beam output power, attenuation amount, and power offset value. Pdisplay (dbm) = Pdefault (dbm) - ATTN (db) + Poffset (db) where Pdisplay: Output power display value (dbm) Pdefault: Maximum output power at shipment (dbm) ATTN: Attenuation amount (db) (See Attenuating the Laser Output(page 5-25).) Poffset: Power offset value (db) (See Changing the Offset of the Display Output Power(page 5-26).) Note The environment and/or secular change may affect the Pdefault. Therefore, the values set in Pdisplay are not guaranteed. These values are used as reference. 5-24

179 5.3 Optical Output by DUAL FP-LD Light Source Module 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. Then select a light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Press <Power> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Power and press the [ENTER] key The Power popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of Power1 or Power2 and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. At this time, when changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set immediately. Optical Output 4. The Power popup screen (for inputting a numeric value) will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note Even if the unit of power is W, power settings are in units of dbm. 5-25

180 5.3 Optical Output by DUAL FP-LD Light Source Module Attenuating the Optical Output In the AQ , the laser output with each wavelength (Power1 (1310 nm), Power2 (1550 nm)) can be attenuated with a desired value (0 to 6.00 db). 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. Then select a light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Press <Att> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Attenuation and press the [ENTER] key. 3. The Attenuation popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of ATT1 or ATT2 and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4. The Attenuation popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. At this time, when changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set immediately. 5-26

181 5.3 Optical Output by DUAL FP-LD Light Source Module Changing the Offset of the Display Output Power By setting a desired value ( to db) to the optical power offset values (PL Offset1, PL Offset2), a value, that a power offset value is added to the laser output power with each wavelength, is used as power display value. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. Then select a light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Press <PL Offset> or move the cursor using the cursor key to PL Offset and press the [ENTER] key The PL Offset popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of PL Offset1 or PL Offset2 and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Optical Output 4. The PL Offset popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5-27

182 5.3 Optical Output by DUAL FP-LD Light Source Module Modulating the Optical Output You can perform the CW or CHOP (50%DUTY) modulation of the optical output. Two kinds of modulation setting methods are provided. Select a desired method corresponding to the application. Follow the steps below to set the laser output modulation. When performing the CHOP modulation output, the LED on the light source panel is lit. Note The absolute value power display shows the power level of the peak value in the CHOP modulation. <Setting through the Panel of the Light Source Module> Every time the [CW/CHOP] key on the light source panel is pressed, the modulation can be switched between CW and CHOP. <Setting through the Panel of the Frame Controller> 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Mod Src> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Mod Source and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Mod Source popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to OFF (for CW) or Internal (for CHOP) and press the [ENTER] key. 5-28

183 Changing the Modulation Frequency 5.3 Optical Output by DUAL FP-LD Light Source Module 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Mod Frq> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Mod Freq and press the [ENTER] key The Mod Freq popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired frequency and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Optical Output Note If Mod Source has been set to Internal, you can set the modulation frequency. Changing the Wavelength Display Unit You can switch the display unit between the wavelength display and frequency display. The following calculation formula shows the relationship between the wavelength and frequency. λ display = c / fdisplay where λ display: Display wavelength (nm) fdisplay: Display frequency (THz) C: Light velocity in vacuum 5-29

184 5.3 Optical Output by DUAL FP-LD Light Source Module 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. Then select a light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Press <Unit>. 3. The Unit popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Wavelength and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Unit popup screen will reappear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of nm (wavelength display) or THz (frequency display) and press the [ENTER] key. 5-30

185 Changing the Power Display Unit You can switch the power display unit between the dbm display and W display. PdBm = 10logPw Pw: Optical power (mw) PdBm: Optical power (dbm) 5.3 Optical Output by DUAL FP-LD Light Source Module 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. Then select a light source module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Press <Unit> The Unit popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Power and press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output 4. The Unit popup screen will reappear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of dbm or W and press the [ENTER] key. 5-31

186 Chapter 6 Optical Output Sweep 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Soft Key Menu Name Opt WL/Freq Power Wl Cal SweepStart SweepStop SweepCond SweepMode LineWidth Df WL -> WL0 Trig WLMC Settle OSA Sync Unit Menu Functional Turns ON or OFF the optical output. Sets the wavelength value. Sets the power value. Calibrates the wavelength. Starts the sweep. Stops the sweep. Sets various sweep conditions. Sets the sweep method (manual, step, continuous). Sets the line width of the optical output. Sets the frequency to the reference wavelength. Registers the current wavelength as reference wavelength. Sets trigger conditions. Sets the execution of the wavelength convergence function. Sets the synchronous sweep with the optical spectrum analyzer. Changes the display unit. Shows the information. 6 Turning ON/OFF the Laser Output The laser output ON/OFF operation can be performed with the push-button switch on the module main body or through the frame controller screen. Since the default setting is OFF, you must turn ON the laser output before using the laser output. This section describes how to turn ON/OFF the laser output. Optical Output Sweep 6-1

187 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Turning ON/OFF the Laser Output from the Module Procedure 1. To turn ON/OFF the laser output, press the [OPT] key provided on the front of the TLS module to be used. 2. The LED indication above the [OPT] key shows the laser ON/OFF status. When the laser is turned ON, the LED is lit. On the contrary, when the laser is turned OFF, the LED is off. Front panel of AQ unit Every time the [OPT] key is pressed, the LED is turned on or off. When the LED is lit, the laser output ON indication is shown and the laser output is linked with the screen display. 6-2

188 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Turning ON/OFF the Laser Output through the Screen 1. Press <Opt> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Opt, and then press the [ENTER] key. 2. The Opt popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to ON, and then press the [ENTER] key. 6 Optical Output Sweep 3. The OPT indication becomes ON. 6-3

189 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Explanation The unit operation is started up with the laser output set at OFF. Two kinds of operating procedures are provided to make the ON/OFF setting of the laser output. Switch on the front panel of the module is changed. Laser output ON/OFF is changed through the menu screen. Either operation can be used to change the laser output. WARNING Never look at the optical output connector or the top end of the optical fiber connected to the optical output connector while the laser beam is being output. The invisible laser beam cannot be seen. However, if the laser beam enters your eye(s), this may cause eye injury and the eyesight to be ruined excessively. Note This unit needs the warming up operation for 1 hr. or longer. When executing the warming up operation, it is necessary to put the unit in the laser ON status. As the laser output is turned OFF, the wavelength calibration is made invalid. Therefore, do not turn OFF the laser output if this operation is not required. The laser cannot be output when the Opt field shows LOCK. When outputting the laser, always check three points shown below. Interlock connector of the frame controller is open. -> Make the connector short-circuited with the short-circuit pin. Correct password is not set. -> Input the password while referring to section 11.3 Setting or Changing the Password. Laser output is locked. -> Turn OFF the LOCK while referring to section 11.3 Setting or Changing the Password. 6-4

190 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Calibrating the Output Wavelength When operating this unit, you must calibrate the wavelength every time the laser output is turned ON. This section describes how to calibrate the wavelength. Procedure 1. Press <WL Cal>. When pressing this button, the WL Calibration screen will appear. 2. The calibration progress status is shown. When pressing <Stop>, the WL Calibration is aborted and the screen is returned to the above screen. 6 Optical Output Sweep 3. When the calibration is completed successfully, the screen is returned to the initial screen. 6-5

191 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Explanation When the wavelength calibration is completed successfully, the screen is returned to the previous screen. At this time, the * indication in the Opt and Wavelength fields showing that the wavelength calibration is not completed will disappear. Even though the wavelength calibration is not completed successfully, the screen is returned to the previous screen, but the * indication showing that the wavelength calibration is not completed does not disappear (remains). indication in Opt field: The wavelength calibration is not completed. The actual output level is smaller than the output value displayed on the screen. * indication in Wavelength field: The wavelength calibration is not completed. * indication showing that the wavelength calibration is not completed. Wavelength Calibration Is Completed. Wavelength Calibration Is Not Completed. Note Before starting the wavelength calibration, warm up the unit for 1 hr. or longer after the optical output of this unit has been turned ON. Once the optical output is turned OFF, the wavelength calibration you have made becomes invalid. If the wavelength calibration is not performed, the absolute wavelength accuracy and relative wavelength accuracy specified for this unit cannot be satisfied. If an error related to the temperature occurs (for details, see section 16.3), the wavelength calibration you have made becomes invalid. 6-6

192 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Sets the Output Wavelength When outputting the fixed wavelength value, you must set an output wavelength value. This section describes how to set this output wavelength value. Procedure 1. Press <WL/Freq> key or move the cursor using the cursor key to Wavelength, and then press the [ENTER] key. 2. The Wavelength popup screen will appear. Input a desired numeric value through the ten-key pad or with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 6 Optical Output Sweep 3. The numeric value you have set is shown in the Wavelength field. 6-7

193 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Explanation In addition to the setting with the wavelength (nm), you can also make the setting with the frequency (THz). The following description is written assuming that the display unit is wavelength (nm). The relationship between the wavelength and frequency is shown as follows. λ (nm) x 10-9 = C/(f (THz) x ) (f (THz) x )= C/(λ (nm) 10-9 ) C: Light velocity in vacuum ( x 10 8 m/s) λ: Display wavelength (nm) f: Display frequency (THz) By synchronizing with the value in the Wavelength field, the current wavelength is shown by the bar. Note The wavelength range of the AQ is 1440 to 1640 nm. The minimum significant digit of the AQ you can set is 1/1000 nm. When the slot, which is newly inserted into the frame controller, is started up or preset, the initial wavelength is fixed at nm. If the insertion position is not changed from that when the frame controller has been turned OFF previously, the value set last in the previous operation is read again to make the settings. 6-8

194 Sets the Offset Value The value of the fixed output wavelength set currently can be offset. First, the wavelength reference of the offset is set, and then the value of the offset Df is set. This section describes how to set each value. Setting the Wavelength Reference of the Offset Procedure 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) 1. Press <WL -> WLO> or move the cursor using the cursor key to WL Ref, and then press the [ENTER] key The WL -> WL0 popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to ON, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. The value in the Wavelength field is then set in the WL Ref field. 6-9

195 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Setting Df. 4. Press <Df> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Df, and then press the [ENTER] key. 5. The Df popup screen will appear. Input a desired numeric value through the tenkey pad or with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 6. The offset value is then added to the value in the Wavelength field. Explanation A desired wavelength within the wavelength range can set for WL Ref. WL Ref becomes the wavelength reference point when using Df. By executing WL Ref, the wavelength set in the Wavelength field can be assigned to WL Ref. With Df, you can set a wavelength to the wavelength set in the WL Ref field in a range of ±Df. The fixed unit of Df is the frequency (GHz). The relationship becomes Wavelength = WL0 + Df. The allowable setting range of Df may depend on the wavelength range of the AQ

196 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Sets the Line Width A desired line width of the laser can be selected from two settings, one is Narrow, which is not modulated and the other is Wide, which is modulated. This section describes how to change the line width. Procedure 1. Press <Linewidth> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Linewidth, and then press the [ENTER] key The Linewidth popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Linewidth, select the desired line width with the cursor, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. The line width you have set is shown in the Linewidth field. Explanation A desired line width can be selected from two types of settings, Narrow and Wide. By setting the line width to Wide, the effects of the interference by reflection are made small to measure the power more steadily. 6-11

197 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Sets the Output Power Level Value The laser output level can be set to a desired level. This section describes how to set a level value manually. Procedure 1. Press <Power> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Power, and then press the [ENTER] key. 2. The Power popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Power, and then press the [ENTER] key. 3. On the popup screen, input a desired numeric value through the ten-key pad or with the cursor key. When pressing [ENTER], the value you have input is shown in the Power field. 6-12

198 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Explanation There are three kinds of laser output setup methods as listed below. Changing and setting the laser output value with manual operation Setting through auto detection of the maximum laser output value at the fixed wavelength Setting through auto detection of the optimal laser output value during sweep The AQ has a laser output level range you can set a different value for each wavelength. Note The laser output value has individual setting range for each AQ The set interval of the laser output value is 0.1 db. The laser output value range you can input does not meet the actual laser output setting range. Each wavelength has an individual range, in which you can change the laser output value variably. If the laser output value exceeds the range of each wavelength, in which you can change the laser output value variably, the * indication is shown in the Power display field. If the * indication is shown, the display value does not meet the output value. The output value becomes smaller than the display value. The connector connection status, environment, and/or secular change may affect the laser output value displayed in the Power display field. Therefore, the Power display does not guarantee the set value. The value in the Power display field is used as reference value. * Non-achievement of Laser Output Level In the AQ , each laser output variable change range of each module to the laser maximum output level and wavelength is different. For wavelength around the short wavelength (from 1440 nm), since the laser output level does not satisfy the minimum value of the Power set value range, the laser output non-achievement indication * is always shown. However, the specifications stated in the catalog are satisfied. 6 Optical Output Sweep * indication in the Opt field is the logical AND of non-achievement of the level and non-execution of the calibration. This shows that the output level in the Power setting field is smaller than a display level of +2.6 dbm at a wavelength of 1440 nm. Note When the laser output non-achievement indication * is displayed, this shows that the display level does not achieve the display level. Even though the laser output non-achievement indication is shown, the laser output level stated in the catalog specification is not satisfied. 6-13

199 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Auto-Setting the Maximum Output Level Value At the Fixed Wavelength The maximum level, which can be output at the currently set fixed wavelength, can be detected automatically. This section describes how to make the setting through the auto detection. Procedure 1. Press <Power> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Power, and then press the [ENTER] key. 2. The Power popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Max, and then press the [ENTER] key. 3. The maximum Power set in the Wavelength field is detected automatically, and then it is shown in the Power field. Note If the level is not achieved even within the variable change range of the output level when the value is displayed in the Power field through the auto detection, the maximum level value to be output within this variable change range is displayed and the warning mark is also shown. 6-14

200 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) At the Sweep The maximum level, which can be output within the wavelength range, in which the sweep is performed, can be detected automatically. This section describes how to make the setting through the auto detection during sweep. Procedure 1. Press <Power> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Power, and then press the [ENTER] key The Power popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Max, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. The Power is detected automatically in the wavelength range set for the sweep, and then it is set. 6-15

201 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Explanation Sweep Max automatically detects an optimal value used to obtain the maximum flatness within the specified wavelength range. For details, see Setting the Power in section 2.1. Note The range of Power to be set may vary depending on each AQ To set the maximum output at all wavelength levels, you can input the maximum value of the allowable output setting using the manual Power setup. 6-16

202 Sets the Sweep Start Wavelength To perform the sweep, it is absolutely necessary to set each sweep wavelength range. The conditions you must set are Start wavelength, Stop wavelength, Sweep step, Sweep cycles, Sweep interval, Dwell time, and Sweep speed. This section describes how to set the Start wavelength. Procedure 1. Press <Sweep Cond> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Start WL, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Sweep Cond in step 1, the Sweep Condition popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Start WL. 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) 6 2. The Start WL popup screen will appear. On the popup screen, input a desired numeric value through the ten-key pad or with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. The numeric value you have set is shown in the Start WL field. Note The wavelength setting range is 1440 to 1640 nm. If a value, which is 1440 or less, is set, 1440 is shown. On the contrary, if a value, which is 1640 or more, is set, 1640 is shown. The minimum significant digit you can set is nm. 6-17

203 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Sets the Sweep Stop Wavelength This section describes how to set the Stop wavelength. Procedure 1. Press <Sweep Cond> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Stop WL, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Sweep Cond in step 1, the Sweep Condition popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Stop WL. 2. The Stop WL popup screen will appear. On the popup screen, input a desired numeric value through the ten-key pad or with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 3. The numeric value you have set is shown in the Stop WL field. Note The wavelength setting range is 1440 to 1640 nm. If a value, which is 1440 or less, is set, 1440 is shown. On the contrary, if a value, which is 1640 or more, is set, 1640 is shown. The minimum significant digit you can set is nm. 6-18

204 Sets the Sweep Step Wavelength This section describes how to set the sweep step. 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Procedure 1. Press <Sweep Cond> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Step WL, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Sweep Cond in step 1, the Sweep Condition popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Step WL The Step WL popup screen will appear. On the popup screen, input a desired numeric value through the ten-key pad or with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. The numeric value you have set is shown in the Step WL field. Note The wavelength setting range is to nm. The minimum significant digit you can set is nm. 6-19

205 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Sets the Sweep Cycles This section describes how to set the sweep cycles. The number of repetition measurement cycles with the same parameters can be set for the sweep cycles. The following Table shows the Sweep Modes, in which the Sweep Cycles setting becomes valid. Sweep Mode Valid Invalid Stepped Manual Continuous Yes Yes Yes Procedure 1. Press <Sweep Cond> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Cycles, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Sweep Cond in step 1, the Sweep Condition popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Sweep Cycles. 2. The Sweep Cycles popup screen will appear. On the popup screen, input a desired numeric value through the ten-key pad or with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 6-20

206 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) 3. The numeric value you have set is shown in the Sweep Cycles field. Note It is possible to combine the Sweep Cycles setting with the Sweep Interval setting. For example, when performing the measurement for 9 hrs. at measurement intervals of 1 hr., this combination setting is valid. The allowable setting range is 0 to cycles. When the Sweep Cycles setting is set at 0, the measurement is repeated infinitely. 6 Optical Output Sweep 6-21

207 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Sets the Sweep Interval This section describes how to set the sweep interval. A period of interval time between completion of the previous measurement and start of the next time during continuous measurement can be set for the sweep interval. The following Table shows the Sweep Modes, in which the Sweep Interval setting becomes valid. Sweep Mode Valid Invalid Stepped Manual Continuous Yes Yes Yes Procedure 1. Press <Sweep Cond> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Interval, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Sweep Cond in step 1, the Sweep Condition popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Sweep Interval. 2. The Sweep Interval popup screen will appear. On the popup screen, input a desired numeric value through the ten-key pad or with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 3. The numeric value you have set is shown in the Sweep Interval field. 6-22

208 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Explanation The sweep interval counts a period of time from standby at the start wavelength. The sweep interval does not include a period of time necessary to return from the end wavelength to the start wavelength. Returns to the start wavelength (return time). Sweep interval (Interval) Execution of sweep Start wavelength End wavelength Note It is possible to combine the Sweep Interval setting with the Sweep Cycles setting. The allowable setting range is 0 to sec. According to the wavelength sweeping range, the return time to the start wavelength is added to the sweep interval. Therefore, the measurement interval is different from the sweep interval. 6 Optical Output Sweep 6-23

209 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Sets the Dwell Time (Lock Time per Wavelength) This section describes how to set the dwell time (lock time per wavelength). For the dwell time, a period of time to lock the wavelength is set. The following Table shows the Sweep Modes, in which the Dwell Time setting becomes valid. Sweep Mode Valid Invalid Stepped Manual Continuous Yes Yes Yes Procedure 1. Press <Sweep Cond> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Dwell Time, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Sweep Cond in step 1, the Sweep Condition popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Dwell Time. 2. The Dwell Time popup screen will appear. On the popup screen, input a desired numeric value through the ten-key pad or with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 3. The numeric value you have set is shown in the Dwell Time field. 6-24

210 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Explanation The dwell time shows a period of time from locking of the wavelength at the set level to starting of the movement to the next wavelength. The dwell time does not include the movement time to the next wavelength. Lock wavelength 1 Lock wavelength 2 Lock wavelength n Note The allowable setting range is 0.1 to sec. 6 Optical Output Sweep 6-25

211 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Sets the Sweep Speed in the Continuous Sweep Mode This section describes how to set the sweep speed. The sweep speed setup provides the following functions. Manual setup: A sweep speed ranging from the maximum speed calculated from the Step wavelength to 0.2 nm/s can be set. Auto setup: The sweep speed setting is automatically detected from the input Step wavelength. Procedure Manual Setup 1. Press <Sweep Cond> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Speed, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Sweep Cond in step 1, the Sweep Condition popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Sweep Speed. 2. The Sweep Speed popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Manual, and then press the [ENTER] key. 3. The Sweep Speed popup screen will appear, allowing you to input a numeric value. On the popup screen, input a desired numeric value through the ten-key pad or with the cursor key, and then press <OK>. 6-26

212 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Auto Setup 1. Press <Sweep Cond> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Speed, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Sweep Cond in step 1, the Sweep Condition popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Sweep Speed. 2. The Sweep Speed popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Max, and then press the [ENTER] key. 6 Optical Output Sweep 3. The automatically set value is then shown in the Sweep Speed field. 6-27

213 6.1 Sets the Tunable Laser Source (TLS Module) Explanation A sweep speed per unit time is set for the sweep speed. Normally, the sweep speed is set at 50 nm/s, that is, the fastest mode. The sweep speed may depend on the Step WL setting. A sweep speed of 50 nm/s cannot be set for all Step WL settings. The upper limit of each sweep speed is determined from the Step WL setting. Therefore, if the sweep speed exceeds the upper limit, the following Warning message will appear. If the Step wavelength is changed after the sweep speed has been detected automatically, the automatically detected value becomes invalid. 6-28

214 6.2 Excutes the Sweep Manual Sweep This manual sweep function moves the wavelength to the next wavelength step with the button operation. This function is convenient to individually evaluate the details at relevant wavelength. First, the operation mode is set to the manual mode, and then the sweep is performed with the button operation. Procedure Setting the Operation Mode to Manual 1. Press <Sweep Mode> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Mode, and then press the [ENTER] key The Sweep Mode popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Manual, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. Manual is shown in the Sweep Mode field. 6-29

215 6.2 Excutes the Sweep Starting the Sweep with the Button Operation 4. When pressing <Sweep Start>, the sweep is started. 5. When pressing <Next>, the movement to the next wavelength is started. Pressing <Stop> will exit the sweep. Explanation The setup items other than valid setup items are dimmed. These setup items are invalid 6-30

216 6.2 Excutes the Sweep The Step Sweep This step sweep function automatically moves the wavelength to the next wavelength after each wavelength has been output for a certain period of time. First, the operation mode is set to the step mode, and then the sweep is performed. Procedure Setting the Operation Mode to Manual 1. Press <Sweep Mode> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Mode, and then press the [ENTER] key The Sweep Mode popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Stepped, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. Stepped is shown in the Sweep Mode field. 6-31

217 6.2 Excutes the Sweep Starting the Sweep with the Button Operation 4. When pressing <Sweep Start>, the sweep is started. 5. When pressing <Pause>, the sweep is stopped temporarily. Pressing <Stop> will exit the sweep. 6. When pressing <Cont>, the temporary stop of the sweep is cancelled. Pressing <Stop> will exit the sweep. 6-32

218 6.2 Excutes the Sweep The Continuous Sweep This continuous sweep function variably changes the wavelength within the sweep range to continuously output it. Procedure Setting the Operation Mode to Continuous 1. Press <Sweep Mode> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Mode, and then press the [ENTER] key The Sweep Mode popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Continuous, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. Continuous is shown in the Sweep Mode field. 6-33

219 6.2 Excutes the Sweep Starting the Sweep with the Button Operation 4. When pressing <Sweep Start>, the sweep is started. 5. Pressing <Stop> will exit the sweep. Explanation The following Table shows the valid setup items in each Sweep Mode. Yes: Valid, No: Invalid Manual Sweep Stepped Sweep Continuous Sweep Start WL Yes Yes Yes Stop WL Yes Yes Yes Step WL Yes Yes Yes Sweep Cycle No Yes Yes Sweep Interval No Yes Yes Dwell Time No Yes No Sweep Speed No No Yes The setup items other than valid setup items are dimmed. Setup items are invalid 6-34

220 6.2 Excutes the Sweep The Trigger Sweep Three kinds of trigger modes are provided and an optimal trigger mode can be selected. The operation described in section 2.1 uses the internal trigger (mode, in which the input trigger is not used). If it is necessary to establish the synchronization with the external unit, the trigger, which is input externally, is used. Mode without use of input trigger Mode, in which the sweep is started with the input trigger Mode, in which the step sweep is started with the input trigger Procedure Mode without Use of Input Trigger 1. Press <Trig> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Input Trig, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Trig in step 1, the Trigger popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Input Trigger The Input Trigger popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Ignore, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. Ignore is shown in the Input Trig field. 6-35

221 6.2 Excutes the Sweep Mode, in which the Sweep Is Started with the Input Trigger 1. Press <Trig> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Input Trig, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Trig in step 1, the Trigger popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Input Trigger. 2. The Input Trigger popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Start, and then press the [ENTER] key. 3. Sweep Start, which you have set, is shown in the Input Trig field. 6-36

222 Mode, in which the Step Sweep Is Started with the Input Trigger 1. Press <Trig> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Input Trig, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Trig in step 1, the Trigger popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Input Trigger. 6.2 Excutes the Sweep 2. The Input Trigger popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Next Step, and then press the [ENTER] key. 6 Optical Output Sweep 3. Next Step, which you have set, is shown in the Input Trig field. Explanation Valid Input Trigger Modes During Sweep Measurement Manual Sweep Stepped Sweep Continuous Sweep Ignore Yes Yes Yes Sweep Start Yes Yes Yes Next Step Yes Yes *Note 1 Note 1: Next step is ignored when setting the mode from other sweep mode to the Continuous Sweep mode. 6-37

223 6.3 Trigger Output Making the Trigger Output Disabled The trigger can be output to the outside every time the sweep conditions, which have been specified, are executed. There are four conditions shown below. Making the trigger output disabled, Outputting the trigger at measurement intervals, Outputting the trigger after completion of the sweep, Outputting the trigger after starting of the sweep. This section describes how to make the setting so that the trigger output is disabled. Procedure 1. Press <Trig> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Output Trig, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Trig in step 1, the Trigger popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Output Trigger. 2. The Output Trigger popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Disable, and then press the [ENTER] key. 3. Ignore is shown in the Output Trig field. 6-38

224 6.3 Trigger Output Outputting the Trigger at Measurement Intervals This section describes how to set the measurement interval (step). Procedure 1. Press <Trig> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Output Trig, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Trig in step 1, the Trigger popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Output Trigger The Output Trigger popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Step Finished, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. Step Finished is shown in the Output Trig field. 6-39

225 6.3 Trigger Output Outputting the Trigger after Completion of the Sweep This section describes how to make the setting so that the trigger is output after completion of the sweep. Procedure 1. Press <Trig> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Output Trig, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Trig in step 1, the Trigger popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Output Trigger. 2. The Output Trigger popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Finished, and then press the [ENTER] key. 3. Sweep Finished is shown in the Output Trig field. 6-40

226 6.3 Trigger Output Outputting the Trigger after Starting of the Sweep This section describes how to make the setting so that the trigger is output after starting of the sweep. Procedure 1. Press <Trig> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Output Trig, and then press the [ENTER] key. If you pressed Trig in step 1, the Trigger popup screen will appear. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to Output Trigger The Output Trigger popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Sweep Started, and then press the [ENTER] key. Optical Output Sweep 3. Sweep Started is shown in the Output Trig field. 6-41

227 6.3 Trigger Output Explanation Disable Making the trigger output disabled (Default setting) Step-Finished Outputting the trigger at measurement intervals Sweep-Finished Outputting the trigger after completion of the sweep Sweep-Started Outputting the trigger after starting of the sweep Valid Output Trigger Modes during Sweep Measurement Manual Sweep Stepped Sweep Continuous Sweep Disable Yes Yes Yes Step Finished Yes Yes Yes Sweep Finished Yes Yes Yes Sweep Started Yes Yes Yes 6-42

228 6.4 Wavelength Convergence Function Increasing the Wavelength Accuracy by Combining with the AQ6140/6141 Wavelength Meter This section describes how to make the setting when this unit is connected to the Wavelength Meter. Required Units and Devices AQ6140/6141 Wavelength Meter Special cable for remote control (accessory of the AQ ) Optical fiber for monitor output (Angled PC-FC) Connections with the AQ6140/6141 Control signal (CONTROL cable) AQ6140/6141 Wavelength Meter (Rear) TLS module 6 Optical Output Sweep Object device to be measured AQ6140/6141 Wavelength Meter (Front) Monitor light for Wavelength Meter The above Fig. shows the connections. Control signal (CONTROL cable): Remote control cable is connected to the AQ and AQ6140/6141. Monitor light for Wavelength Meter: Monitor output optical fiber is connected to the AQ and AQ6140/

229 6.4 Wavelength Convergence Procedure 1. Press <WLMC Settle> or move the cursor using the cursor key to WLMC Settle, and then press the [ENTER] key. 2. The WLMC popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to ON, and then press the [ENTER] key. 3. ON is shown in the WLMC Settle field. 6-44

230 6.4 Wavelength Convergence Explanation The settling wavelength function calibrates the wavelength with high wavelength accuracy by monitoring the wavelength of the AQ with the AQ6140/6141 Wavelength Meter. Additionally, since connectors for the special monitor output to the Wavelength Meter and Wavelength Meter control are provided on the front panel, the variable change wavelength light source having high wavelength accuracy is constructed only with this unit and AQ6140/AQ6141, and without use of external personal computer. Note The wavelength accuracy may depend on the accuracy of the Wavelength Meter to be used. The Continuous-Sweep function cannot be executed while the wavelength convergence function is running. Only the AQ6140/AQ6141 can be used for the Wavelength Meter when using this function. The settling time of one wavelength is approximately 4 to 5 s. When the wavelength cannot be converged within 20 cycles, relevant error is shown and the settling function is aborted. If the WLMC Settle was turned ON once, the Wavelength Meter stays under remote control even if you turn OFF the WLMC Settle. To cancel this remote-controlled status, it is necessary to operate the Wavelength Meter. For details, see the User s Manual of the Wavelength Meter. 6 Optical Output Sweep 6-45

231 6.5 Others Changing the Wavelength Display Unit Either Wavelength [nm] or Frequency [THz] can be selected for the display unit. This section describes how to change the display unit from Wavelength (wavelength) to Frequency (frequency). Procedure 1. Press <Unit>. The Unit popup screen will appear. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Wavelength, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Unit popup screen will appear. 3. Scroll the popup screen display with the cursor key to move the cursor to nm or THz, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Wavelength display will change to Frequency. 6-46

232 6.5 Others Explanation It is possible to switch the display between the wavelength display and frequency display. The wavelength and frequency are calculated from the following formula. l display (nm) x 10-9 = C/(fdisplay (THz) x ) l display: Display wavelength (nm) fdisplay: Display frequency (THz) C: Light velocity in vacuum ( x 10 8 m/s) 6 Optical Output Sweep 6-47

233 6.5 Others Changing the Power Display Unit Either [dbm] or [W] can be selected for the wavelength display unit of Power. This section describes how to change the power display unit. Procedure 1. Press <Unit>. The Unit popup screen will appear. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Power, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Unit popup screen will appear. 3. Scroll the popup screen display with the cursor key to move the cursor to dbm or W, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The unit for Power display will change. Explanation It is possible to switch the display between the dbm display and W display. The wavelength and frequency are calculated from the following formula. PdBm = 10logPw Pw: Optical power (mw) PdBm: Optical power (dbm) 6-48

234 6.5 Others Synchronous Sweep with AQ6317B/C Optical Spectrum Analyzer By combining this unit with the AQ6317B/C Optical Spectrum Analyzer, the synchronous sweep measurement can be performed. This section describes how to set the synchronous sweep measurement. The wavelength for the synchronous sweep of the AQ and optical spectrum analyzer is 1440 to 1640 nm. In this measurement system, points where cannot be measured correctly due to effects of the humidity exist close to the short wavelength (1440 to 1510 nm) of the allowable sweep range. The cause of this trouble is that the atmospheric moisture content existing on the optical path inside the optical spectrum analyzer absorbs the light to be measured. The measurement value is changed by the atmospheric status and/or wavelength reproducibility of the measurement system every time the measurement is performed. Additionally, since the optical path of the optical spectrum analyzer is longer than that of the optical power meter due to its measuring principle, the humidity may adversely affect the optical spectrum analyzer easily. To improve this effect, it is necessary to control the humidity around the optical spectrum analyzer. When mounting this unit on the AQ2201 Frame Controller, the characters are dimmed and the setup is not needed. 6 Optical Output Sweep When mounting this unit on the Frame Controller, this item is fixed at ON. Follow the steps below to connect AQ and AQ6317B/C. 1. Connect the GP-IB connector on the rear of the Frame Controller and the GP- IB2 connector on the AQ6317B/C with the GP-IB cable. 2. Connect TRIGGER OUT on the rear of the Frame Controller and TRG MODE SMPL TRG IN on the AQ6317B/C with the coaxial cable. 3. Connect TRIGGER IN on the rear of the Frame Controller and TLS SYNC OUT on the AQ6317B/C with the coaxial cable. When measuring an object device to be measured, first start the sweep with the AQ connected to the AQ6317B/C using the short fiber to perform the reference measurement. Additionally, it is absolutely necessary that the difference in wavelength between AQ and AQ6317B/C is smaller than the resolution set on the AQ6317B/C. To satisfy this condition, the resolution of the AQ6317B/C is set to 2.0 nm. For details about how to set the resolution, see the User s Manual for AQ6317B/C. The setup items you must set on the TLS module are WL Cal (wavelength calibration), Linewidth (line width), and Power (optical output level). 6-49

235 6.5 Others Frame Controller AQ6317B/C Optical Spectrum Analyzer TRIGGER IN SMPL TRIG IN GP-IB connector TRIGGER OUT GP-IB2 connector TLS SYNC OUT Connection Diagram for Synchronous Sweep of AQ and AQ6317B/C Operating the AQ6317B/C Setting the GP-IB Address 1. Set the GP-IB address of the Frame Controller with the <MORE 1/3> and <TLS ADRS> keys of the SYSTEM switch, rotary knob, step key, or ten-key pad. 2. The GP-IB address of the Frame Controller has been set at 20 before shipment from the factory. Additionally, set an address of the GP-IB2 port with the <MORE 3/3> and <GP- IB2 ADRS> keys of the SYSTEM switch so that it is not overlapped with the address of the Frame Controller. Furthermore, make sure that the <SYSTEM CONTROLLER> key of the soft key menu is highlighted. Setting the Sweep Mode 3. From the soft key menu of the SET UP switch, press <MORE 2/2> and <TLS SYNCSWEEP> keys to highlight the selected mode. Specifying a Measurement Range 4. HOLD, AUTO, MID, or HIGH1 can be set. Presently, HIGH2 and 3 are not applicable. Starting the Sweep 5. When starting the sweep of the AQ6317B/C with the <REPEAT> and <SINGLE> keys or the <SEGMENT MEASURE> key of SWEEP, the wavelength of the AQ mounted on the Frame Controller is synchronized with the sweep. Completing the Sweep 6. Press the <TLS SYNC SWEEP> key again to cancel the highlight display. The synchronous sweep of the AQ cannot be started. Note Before starting the measurement, always calibrate the wavelength of the AQ6317B/C and the AQ If the wavelength calibration is not performed, the sync-loss may occur. Additionally, perform the alignment of the AQ6317B/C. Do not set <RESOLN> of the AQ6317B/C to 2.0 nm or less. Doing so may cause the sync-loss to occur. 6-50

236 Chapter 7 Optical Output Attenuation 7.1 Attenuation by ATTN Module Interrupting the Laser Output You can make the laser output enabled (permit) or disabled (interrupt) using the shutter function. Note that the LED on the module panel is lit when the laser output is made enabled. <Setting through the Panel of the ATTN Module> You can make the laser output enabled or disabled by pressing the ENABLE/DISABLE key on the ATTN panel. <Setting through the Panel of the Frame Controller> 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object ATTN module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Output> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Output and press the [ENTER] key The Output popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of Enable or Disable and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Optical Output Attenuation 7-1

237 7.1 Attenuation by ATTN Module Changing the Optical Attenuation In the ATTN Module, you can attenuate the laser by specifying an attenuation. The following shows the relationship between the attenuation and attenuation offset value. ATTdisplay (db) = ATT (db) + ATToffset (db) where ATTdisplay: ATT: ATToffset: Output power display value (dbm) Attenuation (db) SMF : 0 to 60 db, 0.001dB step MMF : 0 to 45 db, 0.001dB step Attenuation offset value (db) (See Changing the Attenuation Offset Value (page 6-5). 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object ATT module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Att> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Attenuation and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Attenuation popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. At this time, when changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set immediately. 7-2

238 Note If you change the attenuation or wavelength, the message shown in the Fig. below may appear. You cannot operate any key while such message is being displayed. 7.1 Attenuation by ATTN Module Shown on the DETAIL screen. Shown on the SUMMARY screen. Changing the Wavelength In the ATTN Module, you can set a more accurate attenuation by specifying a wavelength For ATTN module applicable to SMF Maximum settable wavelength: nm Minimum settable wavelength: nm For ATTN module applicable to MMF Maximum settable wavelength: nm Minimum settable wavelength: nm 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object ATT module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Wavelength> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Wavelength and press the [ENTER] key. 7 Optical Output Attenuation 4. The Wavelength popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 7-3

239 7.1 Attenuation by ATTN Module Changing the Attenuation Offset Value A value, that an attenuation offset value ( to db) is added to the attenuation, is used as attenuation display value. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object ATT module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Att Offset> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Att Offset and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Att Offset popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Sets the Currently Displayed Attenuation Value to the Attenuation Offset Value 1. Press <d->aoffs>, and the value displayed in the Attenuation field changes to the attenuation offset value and it is displayed in the ATT Offset field. 7-4

240 Changing the Optical Output Set Value The optical attenuation is adjusted automatically so that the set optical output value is obtained. This optical output value includes the power offset value. Set output power = Output power + Power offset value 7.1 Attenuation by ATTN Module 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object ATT module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <P set> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Power Set and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Power Set popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 7 Optical Output Attenuation Note The numeric value may be displayed in red after the optical output set value has been input. This shows that the input optical power cannot be adjusted to the value you have set. If this occurs, input an appropriate value again. If you change the optical output set value, the message shown in the Fig. below may appear. You cannot operateany key while such message is being displayed. Shown on the DETAIL screen. Shown on the SUMMARY screen. 7-5

241 7.2 Attenuation with the ATTN Module While Monitoring Light Changing the Power Display Unit The display unit of the optical output set value (PowerSet) and the optical output monitor value Power is changed to dbm or W. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object ATT module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Unit>. 4. The Unit popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of dbm or W and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 7-6

242 7.2 Attenuation with the ATTN Module While Monitoring Light Setting a Power Offset Value You can use a value, that a power offset value ( to db) is added to the optical output set value or optical output monitor value, as the output power display value. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object ATT module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Power Offset> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Power Offset and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Power Offset popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 7 Optical Output Attenuation When the power offset is set, +offs is shown. 7-7

243 7.2 Attenuation with the ATTN Module While Monitoring Light Setting an Averaging Time Time data you have set here is averaged and it is used as one measurement data. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object ATT module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Avg> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Average and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Average popup screen will appear. Move the cursor to a desired average time with the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 7-8

244 Setting a Display Resolution of Each Set Value You can display each parameter at a decimal place of 1/10, 1/100, or 1/1000. Select a necessary decimal place. Note that the value at the least significant decimal place is made by rounding the value at the most significant decimal place that is not displayed. For units of W, the decimal point can move within the five valid number of digits, therefore there are times when the actual displayed digits are not the same as the specified digits. <Applicable Parameters> Power Set Attenuation Att Offset Power Power Offset 7.2 Attenuation with the ATTN Module While Monitoring Light 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object ATT module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Disp Reso> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Disp Reso and press the [ENTER] key The Disp Reso popup screen will appear. Move the cursor to a desired decimal place with the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Optical Output Attenuation 7-9

245 7.2 Attenuation with the ATTN Module While Monitoring Light Changing the Display Mode The attenuation display field is swapped with the optical output set value field. 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object ATT module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Disp Mode> or move the cursor uisng the cursor key to Disp Mode and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Disp Mode popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to [ATT] or [Pset], and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. (This section describes how to change the attenuation display to the output power display as an example. Select Pset.) 5. The output power display (Power Set) is then shown. 7-10

246 7.2 Attenuation with the ATTN Module While Monitoring Light Displaying the Current Optical Output Monitor Value You can display the current optical output monitor value. This optical output monitor value includes the offset value. Optical output monitor value = Actual output monitor value + Offset value Optical output monitor value: Display monitor value (dbm or W) Actual output monitor value: Value when the offset set value is 0 (dbm or W). Power = Actual output monitor value + Power Offset Starting the ZERO-SET When performing the ZERO-SET, the electrical offset inside the sensor is adjusted, allowing you to accurately measure the absolute value. Two kinds of ZERO-SET modes are provided as desribed below. Select a desired mode to execute the ZERO-SET corresponding to your need. 7 Zero : Starts the ZERO-SET of the current module. Zero All : Starts the ZERO-SET of all mounted sensor modules. 1. Firmly mount the optical shield cap on the optical receiving connector on the sensor you want to perform the ZERO-SET. 2. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 3. Set the sensor module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 4. Press either <Zero> or <Zero All> to start the ZERO-SET. When the ZERO-SET is completed, the screen is returned to the previous screen. Optical Output Attenuation 7-11

247 Chapter 8 Change the Optical Measurement Connection Route 8.1 Change the Connection Route ge OSW Module Simple Type Changing the Connection Port The port with port No. A is connected to that with any of port Nos. 1 to n. For 1 x 4, n becomes 4. For 1 x 8, n becomes 8. For 1 x 16, n becomes Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. On the DETAIL screen, the screen for up to 3 slots is displayed when using the AQ2201 frame controller. When using the AQ2202 frame controller, the screen for up to 9 slots is displayed. Note that the AQ has a screen for up to two slots. Summary Screen of AQ2201 Summary Screen of AQ Set the OSW module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Route> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Route and press the [ENTER] key. Change the Optical Measurement Connection Route 8-1

248 8.1 Change the Connection Route ge OSW Module 4. The Route popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired connection route you want to set, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The route setting is then completed. Dual Type Changing the Connection Port The port with port No. A or B is connected to that with port No. 1 to 2. For 1 x 2, A-1 or A-2. For 2 x 2, A-1,B-2 or A-2,B-2 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. On the DETAIL screen, the screen for up to 3 slots is displayed when using the AQ2201 frame controller. When using the AQ2202 frame controller, the screen for up to 9 slots is displayed. Summary Screen of AQ2201 Summary Screen of AQ Set the OSW module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Route> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Route and press the [ENTER] key. The Route1 or Route2 popup screen will appear. 8-2

249 8.1 Change the Connection Route ge OSW Module 4. Press <Device Select>. Every time <Device Select> is pressed, the display on the popup screen is alternately switched between Route1 and Route2. On the Route1 popup screen, the connection route of Device1 is set. On the Route2 popup screen, the connection route of Device2 is set. 5. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired connection route you want to set and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The route setting is then completed. 8 Change the Optical Measurement Connection Route 8-3

250 Chapter 9 BER Measurement 9.1 Basic Operating Procedures for BERT Module Flow of Operation Preparation Installation (Section 3.1) Mounting the module (Section 3.3) Connecting the power supply (Section 3.2) Connecting with the DUT (Section 3.4) Connecting with a PC (Section 2.9) Measurement Conditions Setup (Section 6.5 in the IM E) PPGIF conditions: Electric/Optic Data amplitude Data offset Data cross point Clock source: Internal/REF Clk/Ext Clk Bitrate and offset Data input: With/without CDR Data threshold Setup: PPG/ED/Couple Measurement pattern and pattern length: PRBS/Prog, Length Error rate Logic Measurement (Section 6.6 in the IM E) Turning ON OFF the output Starting the measurement Adding the error Stopping the measurement Displaying the measurement result 9 BER Measurement End For details, see the sections within parentheses. Note Perform Measurement conditions setup and Measurement in the IM E (Chapter 6). 9-1

251 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself Display Screen The screens of the BERT module are shown in the Figs. below (i.e. the DETAIL screens on page 4-5 to 4-6, and the SUMMARY screens on page 4-7.) The tab Nos. at the upper portion of the DETAIL screen are assigned as shown below. 2: PPG/ED 3: SG Pressing the [CHAN] key or the cursor key will change to the screen of the current module. The items at the right end of the screen correspond to the function keys. Pressing a desired function key on the right of the items shown on the screen will change the item display or make the setting. Additionally, More n/m is displayed on the bottom line of the function key display on this screen, showing that the function key display is shown on n page of m pages. When pressing the More n/m function key, the screen is changed cyclically. The Figs. below shows an example of the function key when the screen is changed with the More key. The lower half portion of the screen shown in the Figs. below is the scroll display. This display can be scrolled with the cursor key. When pressing [Enter] with a function key pressed or an item cursor selected, the Setup popup screen will appear. Select an item with the cursor key and press the [ENTER] key or <OK> function key to set it. To set a numeric value, select a desired numeric value with the cursor key or input a numeric value directly with the ten-key pad. Normally, pressing the [SHIFT] key will enter the ten-key pad input status. However, when the popup screen is shown, you can input a numeric value with the ten-key pad even though the [SHIFT] key is pressed first. Additionally, to exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel> function key. 9-2

252 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself This section describes the display contents of the SUMMARY screen and DETAIL screen. SUMMARY Screen 3-Slot Type Data threshold Shows the threshold value of the input signal of the ED. When Input select = Data In 1(CDR): -350 to 350 [mv] When Input select = Data In 2: -300 to 300 [mv] Input select Shows the data input terminal of the ED. Data In 1: CDR Data In 2: Normal Bitrate Shows the bitrate of the clock of the internal SG to [Gbit/s] SG unlock Shows the operation status of the internal SG using indicators. Indication Green Red Status Normal status Error status 9-Slot Type 9 *: For display items of the 9-slot type, see the display items of the 3-slot type. BER Measurement Note If the value is changed with the Up or Down key on the SUMMARY screen while the Bitrate is being pop-up displayed, the screen is not updated. Therefore, Unlock is not displayed even though the SG Unlock is detected. To check whether or not Unlock is displayed, do not change the value with the UP or DOWN key, but input a value with numeric value keys, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Or, check whether or not Unlock is displayed on the DETAIL screen. On the SUMMARY screen, the information on all mounted modules is displayed at once. The BERT module has a screen for up to three slots, but is displayed on screen as two slots plus a one-slot wide space. 9-3

253 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself APPLICATION Screen The application is software that performs the control with one or multiple modules combined. This module provides BERT application that makes various functions easy-to-use. Normally, this BERT APPLICATION screen is used. For details, see IM E. Current parameter Tab DETAIL Screen PPG Screen Tx bitrate Shows the send bitrate from the PPG. PPG clock alarm Shows the status of the clock to be input to the PPG using the indicators. Indication Green Red Status Normal status Error status Note When using the internal clock, the clock status from the internal SG is shown. On the contrary, when using the external clock, the clock status from the external SG is shown. 9-4

254 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself Display and Setup Items of PPG Item Name Set Value Description Signal output ON / OFF The data output and clock output of the PPG are turned ON or OFF. The outputs of [4] Non-invert data output terminal, [5] Invert data output terminal, [6] Non-Invert clock signal output terminal, [7] Invert clock signal output terminal, and [8] Data (for optical modulator) output terminal are turned ON or OFF at the same time. ON: Output is ON. OFF: Output is OFF. Error add ON / OFF Whether or not the coding error is added to the data output of the PPG is set. ON: Added. OFF: Not added. When the Error mode is Single, Error add is automatically turned OFF after 1-bit error has been added when Error add is turned ON. Error mode Single / Conditions for coding error to be added when Error add is ON are set and displayed. 1.0E-3 / 1.0E-4 / Single: When the Error add key is pressed, only 1-bit coding error is added. 1.0E-5 / 1.0E-6 / 1.0E-3 to 1.0E-12: Coding error is added at the selected coding error rate. 1.0E-7 / 1.0E-8 / 1.0E-9 / 1.0E-10 / 1.0E-11 / 1.0E-12 Clock source Internal /REF Clk /v Ext Clk Internal: The internal SG is used. REF Clk: The clock signal synchronized with the clock input to [14] External synchronization signal input terminal is used. Ext Clk: Operated with 10GHz-band clock input to [15] External clock signal input terminal. Divide ratio 1/16 / 1/64 When the clock source is REF Clk, the frequency dividing ratio of the reference clock signal for external synchronization to bitrate is set and displayed. 1/16: Clock is input, which is 1/16 of the bitrate. 1/64: Clock is input, which is 1/64 of the bitrate. Logic Positive / Negative Whether the PPG data output signal is positive logic or negative logic is set and displayed. Positive: Outputs the positive logic to [4] Non-invert data output terminal and the negative logic to [5] Invert data output terminal. Negative: Outputs the negative logic to [4] Non-invert data output terminal and the positive logic to [5] Invert data output terminal. PPG IF Electric /Optic Whether the electrical interface (BERT module only) is used or optical interface (optional optical modulation module) is used together is set and displayed. Electric: Electrical interface Even though the signal is also output to [8] Data (for optical modulator) output terminal, the proper optical output cannot be obtained from the optical modulation module unless Optical is selected. Optic: Optical interface The signal is not output to [4] Non-invert data output terminal and [5] Invert data output terminal. Data amplitude, Data offset, and Data cross point cannot be set. Data amplitude 0.50 to 2.00 [Vpp] The amplitude of the PPG data output signal is set and displayed. [Data ampli] *2 Step value: 0.01 [Vpp] Both [4] Non-invert data output terminal and [5] Invert data output terminal are set with the same amplitude at the same time. Data offset to 3.00 [V] The DC offset voltage of the PPG data output signal is set and displayed. Step value: 0.01 [V] Both [4] Non-invert data output terminal and [5] Invert data output terminal are set with the same offset voltage at the same time. Data cross point 30 to 70 [%] The cross point position of [4] Non-invert data output terminal of the PPG data [Data cross] *2 Step value: 1 [%] output signal is set and displayed. The cross point signal, that the setting ranging from 100[%] to set value is subtracted, is output to [5] Invert data output terminal. Clock offset to 3.00 [V] The DC offset voltage of the clock output signal is set and displayed. Step value: 0.01 [V] The same offset voltage is output to both [6] Non-invert clock signal output terminal and [7] Invert clock signal output terminal. 9 BER Measurement 9-5

255 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself Item Name Set Value Description Setup PPG / Couple Whether the PPG and ED patterns of the data setting are set individually or the same setting is performed is set and displayed. PPG: Only PPG is set individually. Couple: The same setting is made for the PPG and ED. Pattern *3 PRBS / Prog256 / The type of the PPG output data is set and displayed. {Prog64M} *1 PRBS: PRBS (pseudo random pattern) {SDH / SONET} *1 Prog256: Arbitrary pattern (program pattern) 16 to 256 bits (in steps of 1 bit) {Optional} *1 Prog64M: Arbitrary pattern (program pattern) 256 to 67,108,864 bits (in steps of 128 bits) SDH / SONET: SDH / SONET frame pattern STM-64 / STS192 (155,520 bytes) PRBS length *3 PRBS7 / PRBS9 / When Pattern = PRBS (pseudo random pattern) is selected, the number of PRBS PRBS10 / PRBS11 / pattern length is set and displayed. PRBS15 / PRBS23 / PRBS31 Program length 16 to 256 [bit] When Pattern = Prog256 (program pattern) is selected, the bit length of the [Short length] *2*3 Step value: 1 [bit] arbitrary pattern is set and displayed. Program length 256 to [bit] {Optional} *1 (long) [Long Step value: 128 [bit] When Pattern = Prog64M (program pattern) is selected, the bit length of the length] *2*3 arbitrary pattern is set and displayed. Program edit 00 to FF in hexadecimal When Pattern = Prog256 (program pattern) is selected, the arbitrary pattern is notation/ 0/1 in binary edited. notation When Pattern = Prog64M is selected, the pattern cannot be edited. Payload *3 PRBS9 / PRBS10 / When Pattern = SOH / SONET (frame pattern) is selected, the PRBS pattern PRBS11 / PRBS15 / length of payload is set and displayed. PRBS23 / PRBS31 / Trigger *3 TX1/16 / TX1/64 / The signal to be output to [16] Trigger signal output terminal is set and displayed. TXPatt / TX ERR / TX1/16: Outputs the signal, which is 1/16 of the clock frequency. RX1/16 / RX1/64 / TX1/64: Outputs the signal, which is 1/64 of the clock frequency. RXPatt / RX ERR TXPatt: Outputs the trigger signal synchronized with the output pattern. TX ERR: Outputs the signal every time the error is added to the PPG. RX1/16: Outputs the signal, which is 1/16 of the input clock or regeneration clock frequency. RX1/64: Outputs the signal, which is 1/64 of the input clock or regeneration clock frequency. RXPatt: Outputs the trigger signal synchronized with the input pattern. RX ERR: Outputs the signal every time the error is detected in the input signal. *Information *3 - Shows the version information. *: Operated only with function key. *1: Items in { } are valid only when optional function is selected. *2: Function key is shown in [ ]. *3: These items are also provided on the SUMMARY screen. 9-6

256 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself ED Screen Progress bar Progress Bar/Elapsed Time Display Shows the measurement progress status using the progress bar and the elapsed time. Progress Bar Indication Progress status Green Processed portion White Unprocessed portion Elapsed Time: [dd]:[hh]:[mm]:[ss] Max: 10 days =10:00:00:00 Note The progress bar graphically shows the progress status of the measurement time when the Measure mode is set at Single or Repeat. When the Measure mode is set at Manual, the overall progress bar is displayed in green. Syncloss Shows the synchronization status of the ED using the indicators and sync loss time [unit: ms]. Synchronization Status Indication Status Green Synchronization has been established between measurement start and current operation. Yellow Synchronization was not established in the past, but it is established currently. Red Sync loss status Sync Loss Time Display range: 0 to [ms] and E+09 to E+11 [ms] 9 BER Measurement ERRCount Shows the coding error status using the indicators and the number of coding errors (number of error bits) [unit: bit]. Coding Error Status Indication Status Green No coding error has occurred between measurement start and current operation. Yellow Coding error occurred in the past, but no coding error occurs currently. Red Coding error status Number of Coding Errors Display range: 0 to [bit] and E+09 to E+15 [bit] 9-7

257 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself ERRRate Shows the coding error rate (error rate). Coding error rate Display range: E-10 (to E-16)* (error free) to E-16 (error occurs.) to E-00 (all are errors.) *: The exponential may vary depending on the period of measurement. However, the resulting value is identical. Note In the Syncloss (sync loss) status, the error measurement is not performed. For example, when 10sec.-measurement is made once and Syncloss occurs for 4 sec. ( [ms]), the error measurement is actually performed for 6 sec. ( [ms]). In this case, 6sec.-ERRCount and ERRRate may result. 9-8

258 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself Display and Setup Items of ED Item Name Set Value Description *Page select Result The Result screen is displayed. *Measure *3 Start / Stop The measurement is started or stopped. Start: Starts the measurement. Stop: Stops the measurement. *Disp mode *3 Current /100ms / Last The timing to update the screen is set and displayed. Current: Shows the value accumulated from the start of measurement in real time. 100ms: Shows the value measured for 100ms at intervals of 100ms. Last: Shows the value for one cycle until the measurement for the next cycle completes. *Clear hist *3 - The measurement history is cleared. Data threshold -350 to 350 [mv] The threshold voltage of the data input of the ED is set and displayed. [Data thre] *2*3 when Input select=datain1-300 to 300 [mv] when Input select=datain2 Step value:1 [mv] Input select *3 Data in 1 / Data in 2 The input terminal of the ED data signal is set and displayed. Data in 1: Measures the signal of [11] Data input 1 terminal built-into the CDR. Data in 2: Measures the signal of [12] Data input 2 terminal. When selecting this item, the clock input is required. Measure mode Single / Manual / The measurement mode is set and displayed. [Mes mode] *2*3 Repeat Single: The measurement is performed for a period of measurement time set in Measure day / Measure time. Manual: The measurement is performed until the measurement is stopped. (However, note that the maximum measurement period is 10 days.) Repeat: The measurement is performed repeatedly for a period of measurement time set in Measure day / Measure time. Measure day 0 to 10 [day] The measurement period (number of days) is set and displayed. [Mes day] *2*3 Step value: 1 [day] Measure time 00:00:01 to 23:59:59 The measurement period (hour, minute, second) is set and displayed. [Mes time] *2*3 [h]:[m]:[s] Step value: 1[h] / 1[m] / 1[s] Buzzer *3 OFF /Soft / Medium / The buzzer sound volume, which is given if the error is detected, is set and Loud displayed. OFF: No buzzer sound Soft: Small buzzer sound Medium: Medium buzzer sound Loud: Loud buzzer sound Auto sync *3 ON / OFF Whether the auto synchronization of the ED is turned ON or OFF is set and displayed. ON: Turns ON the auto synchronization. OFF: Turns OFF the auto synchronization. Normally, this item is set at ON. However, when this item is set at OFF, the signal having many errors can be measured. For details, see section 7.2. Logic *3 Positive / Negative Whether the ED data input is the positive logic or negative logic is set and displayed. Positive: Positive logic Negative: Negative logic Setup ED / Couple Whether the PPG and ED patterns of the data setting are set individually or the same setting is performed is set and displayed. ED: Only ED is set individually. Couple: The same setting is made for the PPG and ED. 9 BER Measurement 9-9

259 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself Item Name Set Value Description Pattern *3 PRBS / Prog256 / The type of the ED measurement data is set and displayed. {Prog64M} *1 PRBS: PRBS (pseudo random pattern) {SDH / SONET} *1 Prog256: Arbitrary pattern (program pattern) 16 to 256 bits (in steps of 1 bit) {Optional} *1 Prog64M: Arbitrary pattern (program pattern) 256 to 67,108,864 bits (in steps of 128 bits) SDH / SONET: SDH / SONET frame pattern STM-64 / STS192 (155,520 bytes) PRBS length *3 PRBS7 / PRBS9 / When Pattern = PRBS (pseudo random pattern) is selected, the number of PRBS PRBS10 / PRBS11 / pattern length is set and displayed. PRBS15 / PRBS23 / PRBS31 Program length 16 to 256 [bit] When Pattern = Prog256 (program pattern) is selected, the bit length of the [Short length] *2*3 Step value: 1 [bit] arbitrary pattern is set and displayed. Program length 256 to [bit] {Optional} *1 (long) [Long Step value: 128 [bit] When Pattern = Prog64M (program pattern) is selected, the bit length of the length] *2*3 arbitrary pattern is set and displayed. Program edit 00 to FF in hexadecimal When Pattern = Prog256 (program pattern) is selected, the arbitrary pattern is notation, 0/1 in binary edited. notation When Pattern = Prog64M is selected, the pattern cannot be edited. Payload *3 PRBS9 / PRBS10 / When Pattern = SOH / SONET (frame pattern) is selected, the PRBS pattern PRBS11 / PRBS15 / length of payload is set and displayed. PRBS23 / PRBS31 / Trigger *3 TX1/16 / TX1/64 / The signal to be output to [16] Trigger signal output terminal is set and displayed. TXPatt / TX ERR / TX1/16: Outputs the signal, which is 1/16 of the clock frequency. RX1/16 / RX1/64 / TX1/64: Outputs the signal, which is 1/64 of the clock frequency. RXPatt / RX ERR TXPatt: Outputs the trigger signal synchronized with the output pattern. TX ERR: Outputs the signal every time the error is added to the PPG. RX1/16: Outputs the signal, which is 1/16 of the input clock or regeneration clock frequency. RX1/64: Outputs the signal, which is 1/64 of the input clock or regeneration clock frequency. RXPatt: Outputs the trigger signal synchronized with the input pattern. RX ERR: Outputs the signal every time the error is detected in the input signal. *Information *3 - Shows the version information. *: Operated only with function key. *1: Items in { } are valid only when optional function is selected. *2: Function key is shown in [ ]. *3: These items are also provided on the SUMMARY screen. 9-10

260 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself SG Screen SG Unlock Shows the operation status of the internal SG using the indicators. Status Indication Status Green Normal status Red Error status Bitrate Shows the bitrate of the built-in SG to [Gbit/s] Offset Shows the frequency displacement amount of the bitrate to 100 [ppm] Display and Setup Items of SG Item Name Set Value Description Bitrate * to The bitrate of the built-in SG clock is set and displayed. [Gbit/s] If the bitrate is changed, the frequency sync loss of the SG may occur Step value: instantaneously. If the sync loss occurs, the frequency may deviate largely. [Gbit/s] Offset *3-100 to 100 [ppm] The frequency displacement amount from the set bitrate is set and displayed in units Step value: 1 [ppm] of ppm. Even though the offset is changed, the frequency sync loss of the SG does not occur. *Information *3 - Shows the version information. *: Operated only with function key. *3: These items are also provided on the SUMMARY screen. 9 BER Measurement 9-11

261 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself Screen Configuration Diagram DETAIL Screen Screen Name (Tab) Setup Item Set Value PPG Signal output ON / OFF Error add Error mode Clock source ON / OFF Single / 1.0E-3 / 1.0E-4 / 1.0E-5 / 1.0E-6 / 1.0E-7 / 1.0E-8 / 1.0E-9 / 1.0E-10 / 1.0E-11 / 1.0E-12 Internal / REF Clk / Ext Clk Divide ratio 1/16 / 1/64 Logic PPG IF Data amplitude [Data ampli] *2 Data offset Data cross point [Data cross] *2 Clock offset Setup Positive / Negative Electric / Optic 0.50 to 2.00 [Vpp] to 3.00 [V] 30 to 70 [%] to 3.0 [V] PPG / Couple Pattern PRBS / Prog256 / {Prog64M} *1 {SDH / SONET} *1 PRBS length Program length [Short ength] *2 Program length(long) [Long length] *2 Program edit Payload Trigger PRBS7 / PRBS9 / PRBS10 / PRBS11 / PRBS15 / PRBS23 / PRBS31 16 to 256 [bit] {128 to 67, 108, 864 [bit]} *1 00 to FF in hexadecimal notation, 0/1 in binary notation. {PRBS9 / PRBS10 / PRBS11 / PRBS15 / PRBS23 / PRBS31} *1 TX1/16 / TX1/64 / TXPatt / TXERR / RX1/16 / RX1/64 / RXPatt / RXERR *Information *: Operated only with function key. *1: Items in { } are valid only when optional function is selected. *2: Function key is shown in [ ]. 9-12

262 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself Screen Name (Tab) Setup Item Set Value ED *Page select Result *Measure *Disp mode Start / Stop Current / 100ms / Last *Clear hist Data threshold [Data thre] *2-350 to 350 [mv] when Input select is Data In 1(CDR) to 300 [mv] when Input select is Data In 2(Normal). Input select Data In 1 / Data In 2 Measure mode [Mes mode] *2 Measure day [Mes day] *2 Measure time [Mes time] *2 Buzzer Auto sync Logic Setup Single / Manual / Repeat 0 to 10 [day] 00:00:01 to 23:59:59 [h]:[m]:[s] OFF / Soft / Medium / Loud ON / OFF Positive / Negative ED / Couple Pattern PRBS / Prog256 / PRBS / Prog256 / {Prog64M} *1 {SDH / SONET} *1 PRBS length Program length [Short ength] *2 Program length(long) [Long length] *2 Program edit Payload Trigger *Information PRBS7 / PRBS9 / PRBS10 / PRBS11 / PRBS15 / PRBS23 / PRBS31 16 to 256 [bit] {256 to 67,108,864 [bit]}*1 SG Bitrate 9.95 to [Gbit/s] Offset 00 to FF in hexadecimal notation, 0/1 in binary notation. {PRBS9 / PRBS10 / PRBS11 / PRBS15 / PRBS23 / PRBS31} *1 TX1/16 / TX1/64 / TXPatt / TXERR / RX1/16 / RX1/64 / RXPatt / RXERR -100 to 100 [ppm] 9 BER Measurement *Information *: Operated only with function key. *1: Items in { } are valid only when optional function is selected. *2: Function key is shown in [ ]. 9-13

263 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself SUMMARY Screen Screen Name (Tab) Setup Item Set Value PPG/ED *Measure Start / Stop *Disp mode Current / 100ms / Last *Clear hist Data threshold [Data thre] *2-350 to 350 [mv] when Input select is Data In 1 (CDR) -300 to 300 [mv] when Input select is Data In 2 (Normal) Input select Data In 1 / Data In 2 *Mes mode *Mes day *Mes time *Buzzer *Auto sync *Logic Single / Manual / Repeat 0 to 10 [day] 00:00:01 to 23:59:59 [h]:[m]:[s] OFF / Soft / Medium / Loud ON / OFF Positive / Negative *Pattern PBRS / Prog256 / {Prog64M} *1 / {SDH/SONET} *1 *PBRS length *Short length *Long length *Payload *Trigger PRBS7 / PRBS9 / PRBS10 / PRBS11 / PRBS15 / PRBS23 / PRBS31 16 to 256 [bit] {256 to 67,108,864 [bit]}*1 {PRBS9 / PRBS10 / PRBS11 / PRBS15 / PRBS23 / PRBS31} *1 TX1/16 / TX1/64 / TXPatt / TXERR / RX1/16 / RX1/64 / RXPatt / RXERR *Information SG Bitrate 9.95 to [Gbit/s] *Offset -100 to 100 [ppm] *Information *: Operated only with function key. *1: Items in { } are valid only when optional function is selected. *2: Function key is shown in [ ]. 9-14

264 Operation Examples Parameter Selection Items Procedure To Set Signal Output 9.2 Operating the BERT Module by Itself 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. Press the [CHAN] key to select a current module you want to change (PPG in this example). 3. For parameters having the function keys, press relevant function key (<Signal output> in this example) or move the cursor to change the current parameter to a parameter you want to change with the cursor key (Signal output in this example), and then press the [ENTER] key. The popup screen for the parameter you want to change appears. 4. With the cursor key, move the cursor to an item you want to change (ON/OFF in this example), and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The popup screen will disappear and the item you have selected is then set and displayed. 9 BER Measurement Note To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-15

265 Gbit/s Optical Modulator Flow of Operation Preparation Installation (Section 3.1) Mounting the module (Section 3.3) Connecting the power supply (Section 3.2) Connecting with the DUT (Section 3.4) Connecting with a PC (Section 2.9) Measurement Conditions Setup (Section 6.5 in the IM E) PPG IF conditions: Optic setting * Measurement pattern and pattern length: PRBS/Prog, Length Error rate Logic settings of PPG, ED, and EO DriverGain CrossPoint Auto Bias Control Data threshold Measurement (Section 6.6 in the IM E) Turning ON OFF the output Starting the measurement Adding the error Stopping the measurement Displaying the measurement result End For details, see the sections within parentheses. *: If you set PPG IF to Optic, no signal is output to the DATA OUT terminal nor the DATA OUT terminal. Note Perform Measurement conditions setup and Measurement in the IM E (Chapter 6). 9-16

266 Gbit/s Optical Modulator Display Screen This section describes the display contents of the SUMMARY screen and DETAIL screen. SUMMARY Screen Driver Gain Shows the output amplitude setting of the internal LN driver. Display range: 0 to 255 Driver Gain Shows the output amplitude setting of the internal LN driver. Display range: 0 to 255 DETAIL Screen Driver Gain Shows the output amplitude setting of the internal LN driver using the numeric value and graph. Display range: 0 to 255 Cross Point Shows the cross point setting of the internal LN driver output waveform using the numeric value and graph. Display range: -31 to 32 ABC Slope Shows the Slope setting status of the ABC. This item is displayed when the ABC is set at ON. Alarm The alarm status of the module is detected and it is shown. TEMP Shows the temperature alarm. Indication Red Yellow Green Description Correct status Auto Bias Ctrl Shows the ON/OFF status of the ABC. LN Bias set Shows the DC bias voltage of the LN modulator. This item is displayed when the ABC is set at OFF. Display range: to 9.90 V The temperature exceeds the upper limit of the storage temperature. Since the component may be broken thermally in this status, the power supply from the frame to the module is automatically stopped. Immediately stop the operation and lower the ambient temperature. The temperature exceeds the upper limit of the operating temperature. If the operation is continued, this may cause operation fault. 9 BER Measurement ABC Shows the status of the auto bias control (Auto Bias Control) circuit of the LN modulator. Indication Green Red Status Correct Fault 9-17

267 Gbit/s Optical Modulator Screen Configuration Diagram Screen Name (Tab) Setup Item Set Value Optical Modulator Driver Gain 0 to 255 Cross Point -31 to 32 ABC Slope Auto Bias Ctrl [ABC Enable] *1 LN Bias (Set) *2 Positive / Negative ON / OFF to 9.90 [V] *ABC Reset *Information *Preset *: Operated only with function key. *1: Function key is shown in [ ]. *2: Function key is shown with the word(s) in ( ) omitted. Display and Setup Items Item Name Set Value Description Driver Gain 0 to 255 The output amplitude setting of the internal LN driver Step value: 1 output waveform and set value are displayed using the numeric values and graphs. As the output amplitude is changed, the extinction ratio can be changed. 0 shows the amplitude decrease (extinction ratio decrease) direction while 255 shows the amplitude increase (extinction ratio increase) direction. Cross point -31 to 32 The cross point setting of the internal LN driver and set Step value: 1 value are displayed using the numeric values and graphs. The cross point may depend on the ABC Slope. ABC Slope Positive / The polarity of the DC bias point of the LN modulator is Negative set and displayed when the Auto Bias Control (ABC) is made valid. Whether the ABC is locked on the Positive side or Negative side is set. Positive: ABC is locked on the Positive side. Negative: ABC is locked on the Negative side. Auto Bias Ctrl ON / OFF Whether or not the auto bias control (ABC: Auto Bias [ABC Enable] *1 Control) circuit is operated to automatically correct the DC drift of the LN modulator is set. ON: ABC is operated. OFF: ABC is not operated. LN Bias (Set) * to 9.90 [V] Step value: 0.01 [V] *ABC Reset - The ABC alarm is reset. The DC bias of the LN modulator is set manually. This item becomes valid only when the Auto Bias Ctrl is set at OFF. The setting change becomes invalid when the Auto Bias Ctrl is set at ON. When the setting of the Auto Bias Ctrl is changed from OFF to ON, the above set value will be lost (cleared). *Information - The type and version information of the optical modulator are displayed. *Preset - Each set value is returned to that set at shipment of the factory. For details about factory default settings (page 11-14). *: Operated only with function key. *1: Function key is shown in [ ]. *2: Function key is shown with the word(s) in ( ) omitted. 9-18

268 Operation Examples Setting the Gain of The Driver for the Optical Modulator Procedure Gbit/s Optical Modulator 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Modulator for the current module. 3. Press <Driver gain>, or move the cursor to Driver gain with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Driver gain set popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The Driver gain set popup screen will disappear and the set value is then set and displayed. 9 Explanation The output amplitude of the optical modulator driver is set and displayed. DriverGain: 0 to step BER Measurement Note When changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set accordingly. When SHIFT is displayed, the ten-key pad can be used. To use the ten-key pad if SHIFT is not displayed, press the [SHIFT] key. If a value beyond the setting range of the specification is input with the ten-key pad, and then the <OK> or [ENTER] key is pressed, a value most close to that within the setting range of the specification is then set. To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-19

269 Gbit/s Optical Modulator The following shows the relationship between the numeric value and graph display of the driver gain. According to the driver gain value, the graph display is painted in red. Driver Gain is 0. Driver Gain 0 Driver Gain is 150. Driver Gain 150 Driver Gain is 255. Driver Gain

270 Setting the Cross Point of the Driver for the Optical Modulator Procedure Gbit/s Optical Modulator 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Modulator for the current module. 3. Press <Cross Point>, or move the cursor to Cross Point with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Cross Point popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The Cross Point popup screen will disappear and the set value is then set and displayed. 9 Explanation The cross point of the optical modulator driver is set and displayed. Cross Point: -31 to 32 1 step BER Measurement Note When changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set accordingly. When SHIFT is displayed, the ten-key pad can be used. To use the ten-key pad if SHIFT is not displayed, press the [SHIFT] key. If a value beyond the setting range of the specification is input with the ten-key pad, and then the <OK> or [ENTER] key is pressed, a value most close to that within the setting range of the specification is then set. To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-21

271 Gbit/s Optical Modulator The following shows the relationship between the numeric value and graph display of the cross point. According to the cross point value, the display position of the bar is changed. Cross Point is -31. Cross Point -31 Cross Point is 0. Cross Point 0 Cross Point is 32. Cross Point

272 Gbit/s Optical Modulator Selecting the ABC Slope Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Modulator for the current module. 3. Press <ABC Slope>, or move the cursor to ABC Slope with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 4. The ABC Slope popup screen will appear. With the cursor key, move the cursor to either Positive or Negative, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The ABC Slope popup screen will disappear and the selected item is then set and displayed. 9 Explanation The ABC slope status of the optical modulator is set and displayed. BER Measurement ABC Slope Positive: ABC is locked on the Positive side. Negative: ABC is locked on the Negative side. Note This item becomes valid when ON is selected for the Auto Bias Ctrl. When the Auto Bias Ctrl is set to OFF, this item is dimmed (shown in gray) and it cannot be selected. To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-23

273 Gbit/s Optical Modulator Resetting the ABC Alarm Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Modulator for the current module. 3. Press <ABC Reset>. 4. The ABC Reset popup screen will appear. To reset the ABC, press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The ABC Reset popup screen will disappear and the ABC is then reset. Explanation The ABC Alarm is kept in red if the ABC alarm is detected even only once after the ABC Reset has been executed. Note The ABC Reset (ABC reset) can be operated only with the function key. To exit the popup screen without use of ABC Reset, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-24

274 Gbit/s Optical Modulator Making the ABC Enabled Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Modulator for the current module. 3. Press <ABC Enable>, or move the cursor to Auto Bias Ctrl with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Auto Bias Ctrl popup screen will appear. With the cursor key, move the cursor to either ON or OFF, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The Auto Bias Ctrl popup screen will disappear and the selected value is then set and displayed. 9 Explanation Whether or not the auto bias control (ABC) of the optical modulator is used is set and displayed. BER Measurement Auto Bias Ctrl ON: ABC is used (enabled). OFF: ABC is not used (disabled). Note When the Auto Bias Ctrl is set at OFF, the manual bias setup (LN Bias Set) becomes valid. To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-25

275 Gbit/s Optical Modulator Setting the Bias Manually Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Modulator for the current module. 3. Press <LN Bias>, or move the cursor to LN Bias Set, and then press the [ENTER] key. 4. The LN Bias Set popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The LN Bias Set popup screen will disappear and the set value is then set and displayed. Explanation The DC bias voltage of the optical modulator is manually set and displayed. LN Bias Set: to 9.90 [V] 0.01 [V] step Note This item becomes valid when OFF is selected for the Auto Bias Ctrl. When the Auto Bias Ctrl is set to ON, this item is dimmed (shown in gray) and it cannot be selected. When the Auto Bias Ctrl is changed from OFF to ON, the values, which have been set when the Auto Bias Ctrl has been set at OFF, will be lost (cleared). When changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set accordingly. When SHIFT is displayed, the ten-key pad can be used. To use the ten-key pad if SHIFT is not displayed, press the [SHIFT] key. If a value beyond the setting range of the specification is input with the ten-key pad, and then the <OK> or [ENTER] key is pressed, a value most close to that within the setting range of the specification is then set. To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-26

276 Gbit/s Optical Modulator Displaying the Version Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Modulator for the current module. 3. Press <Information>. 4. The Information popup screen will appear. 5. Press the [ENTER] key, and the Information popup screen will disappear. 9 Explanation Note The Information (version display) can be operated only with the function key. BER Measurement 9-27

277 Gbit/s Optical Modulator Returning to the Factory Default Settings Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Modulator for the current module. 3. Press <Preset>. 4. The Preset popup screen will appear. Press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The Preset popup screen will disappear, and then the Optical Modulator is returned to its factory default settings. Explanation Note The Preset (factory default setting) can be operated only with the function key. For details about factory default setting (initial setting) values (page 11-14). To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-28

278 Gbit/s Optical Receiver Flow of Operation Preparation Installation (Section 3.1) Mounting the module (Section 3.3) Connecting the power supply (Section 3.2) Connecting with the DUT (Section 3.4) Connecting with a PC (Section 2.9) Measurement Conditions Setup (Section 6.5 in the IM E) PPG IF conditions: Optic setting * Measurement pattern and pattern length: PRBS/Prog, Length Error rate Logic settings of PPG, ED, and EO DriverGain CrossPoint Auto Bias Control Data threshold Measurement (Section 6.5 in the IM E) Turning ON OFF the output Starting the measurement Adding the error Stopping the measurement Displaying the measurement result End For details, see the sections within parentheses. 9 BER Measurement *: If you set PPG IF to Optic, no signal is output to the DATA OUT terminal nor the DATA OUT terminal. Note Perform Measurement conditions setup and Measurement in the IM E (Chapter 6). 9-29

279 Gbit/s Optical Receiver Display Screen This section describes the display contents of the SUMMARY screen and DETAIL screen. SUMMARY Screen Data threshold Shows the threshold value setting for identification of the logic to the electric data after completion of the optical-electric conversion. Display range: -364 to 273 Input Pow Shows the average optical input power. Measurement range: dbm to +3.0 dbm (accuracy: ±1 db) Input Status Within measurement range Display Beyond measurement range <-19 dbm >+3 dbm dbm to +3.0 dbm Note that the sensitivity correction by the temperature and waveform length is not made. 9-30

280 Gbit/s Optical Receiver DETAIL Screen Data threshold Shows the threshold value setting for identification of the logic to the electric data after completion of the optical-electric conversion. Display range: -364 to 273 Data output Shows the output port status. Input Power Shows the average optical input power. Measurement range: dbm to +3.0 dbm (accuracy: ±1 db) Input Status Within measurement range Display Beyond measurement range <-19 dbm dbm to +3.0 dbm >+3 dbm Note that the sensitivity correction by the temperature and waveform length is not made. Los point Shows the Los detection level dbm to +2.0 dbm Alarm Detects the alarm status of the module to indicate it. TEMP Shows the temperature alarm. Wavelength Shows the wavelength band of the receiving light signal. 1.5 m / 1.3 m Overload point Shows the Overload detection level dbm to +2.0 dbm Indication Red Yellow Green Description The temperature exceeds the upper limit of the storage temperature. Since the component may be broken thermally in this status, the power supply from the frame to the module is automatically stopped. Immediately stop the operation and lower the ambient temperature. The temperature exceeds the upper limit of the operating temperature. If the operation is continued, this may cause operation fault. Correct status 9 OVER *1, *2 Monitors the average power of the optical input. If the average power exceeds the Overload level, the LED (red) is lit. (Detection accuracy: ±1 db) Indication Green Red Status Correct status Overload status LOS (Loss of Signal) *1, *2 Monitors the average power of the optical input. If the average power is less than the LOS level, the LED (red) is lit. (Detection accuracy: ±1 db) BER Measurement Indication Green Red Status Correct status LOS status *1: Since the bit error is not detected, the bit error does not always occur even though the alarm LED is lit in red. *2: The alarm indication is interlocked with the LED on the front panel. 9-31

281 Gbit/s Optical Receiver Screen Configuration Diagram Screen Name (Tab) Setup Item Set Value Optical Receiver Data thresh(old) *1-364 to 273 Data Output Over load (point) *1 Loss point Wave length ON / OFF dbm to +2.0 dbm dbm to +2.0 dbm 1.5 m / 1.3 m *Information *Preset *: Operated only with function key. *1: Function key is shown with the word(s) in ( ) omitted. Display and Setup Items Item Name Set Value Description Data thresh -364 to 273 The threshold value for identification of the logic to the (old) *1 Step value: 1 electric data after completion of the optical-electric conversion is set. Data output ON / OFF Wavelength 1.5 mm / 1.3 mm The DATA OUT port (electric output) is turned ON or OFF. ON: Data is output. OFF: Data output is stopped. (GND level) The wavelength band of the receiving light signal is set. With this setting, the sensitivity of the Input Power Monitor is simply corrected. If the wavelength band setting is changed, the values for Overload point and LOS point are reset to the factory default settings. 1.5 mm: Select this when 1.5um-wavelength band is used. 1.3 mm: Select this when 1.3um-wavelength band is used. Overload to +2.0 [dbm] The Overload detection level is set. (point) *1 Step value: 0.1 [dbm] LOS point to +2.0 [dbm] The LOS (Loss of signal) detection level is set. Step value: 0.1 [dbm] *Information - The type and version information of the optical receiver are displayed. *Preset - Each set value is returned to that set at shipment of the factory. For details about factory default settings (page 11-14). *: Operated only with function key. *1: Function key is shown with the word(s) in ( ) omitted. 9-32

282 Gbit/s Optical Receiver Operation Example Setting the Data Threshold Value Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Receiver for the current module. 3. Press <Data Thresh>, or move the cursor to Data threshold with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Data Threshold popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The Data Threshold popup screen will disappear and the set value is then set and displayed. 9 Explanation The threshold value for identification of the logic to the electric data after completion of the optical-electric conversion is set and displayed. BER Measurement Data threshold: -364 to step Note When changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set accordingly. When SHIFT is displayed, the ten-key pad can be used. To use the ten-key pad if SHIFT is not displayed, press the [SHIFT] key. If a value beyond the setting range of the specification is input with the ten-key pad, and then the <OK> or [ENTER] key is pressed, a value most close to that within the setting range of the specification is then set. To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-33

283 Gbit/s Optical Receiver The following shows the relationship between the numeric value and graph display of the data threshold. According to the data threshold value, the graph display is painted in red. Data threshold is Data threshold -364 Data threshold is 0. Data threshold 0 Data threshold is 273. Data threshold

284 Gbit/s Optical Receiver Turning ON or OFF the Data Output Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Receiver for the current module. 3. Press <Data Output>, or move the cursor to Data output with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Data output popup screen will appear. With the cursor key, move the cursor to either ON or OFF, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The Data output popup screen will disappear and the item you have selected is then set and displayed. 9 Explanation The ON/OFF status of the data output of the DATA OUT port is set and displayed. BER Measurement Data output ON: Data is being output. OFF: Data output is stopped. Note To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-35

285 Gbit/s Optical Receiver Setting the Overload Detection Level Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Receiver for the current module. 3. Press <Over-load>, or move the cursor to Overload point with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Overload point popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The Overload point popup screen will disappear and the set value is then set and displayed. Explanation The OVERLOAD detection level is set and displayed. Overload point: to +2.0 [dbm] 0.1 [dbm] step Note If an optical signal exceeding the detection level set in Overload point is input, the OVER LED (red) on the panel is lit and the OVER indicator of the Alarm is changed to the red indication. When changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set accordingly. When SHIFT is displayed, the ten-key pad can be used. To use the ten-key pad if SHIFT is not displayed, press the [SHIFT] key. If a value beyond the setting range of the specification is input with the ten-key pad, and then the <OK> or [ENTER] key is pressed, a value most close to that within the setting range of the specification is then set. To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-36

286 Gbit/s Optical Receiver Setting the Loss Detection Level Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Receiver for the current module. 3. Press <Los point>, or move the cursor to Los point with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Los point popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The Los point popup screen will disappear and the set value is then set and displayed. 9 Explanation The LOS (Loss of signal) detection level is set and displayed. BER Measurement Los point: to +2.0 [dbm] 0.1 [dbm] step Note If an optical signal below the detection level set in Overload point is input, the OVER LED (red) on the panel is lit and the OVER indicator of the Alarm is changed to the red indication. When changing the numeric value with the cursor key, the set value is set accordingly. When SHIFT is displayed, the ten-key pad can be used. To use the ten-key pad if SHIFT is not displayed, press the [SHIFT] key. If a value beyond the setting range of the specification is input with the ten-key pad, and then the <OK> or [ENTER] key is pressed, a value most close to that within the setting range of the specification is then set. To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-37

287 Gbit/s Optical Receiver Selecting the Wavelength Band of the Receiving Light Signal Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Receiver for the current module. 3. Press <Wavelength>, or move the cursor to Wavelength with the cursor key, and then press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Wavelength popup screen will appear. With the cursor key, move the cursor to either 1.5um or 1.3um, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The Wavelength popup screen will disappear and the value you have selected is then set and displayed. Explanation The wavelength band of the receiving light is set and displayed. By setting the wavelength band, the wavelength of the simple power monitor (Received Power) is corrected easily. The wavelength is not corrected within the wavelength band. Wavelength 1.5 mm: When the wavelength of the receiving light is 1.5 mm-band 1.3 mm: When the wavelength of the receiving light is 1.3 mm-band Note To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-38

288 Gbit/s Optical Receiver Displaying the Version Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Receiver for the current module. 3. Press <Information>. 4. The Information popup screen will appear. 5. Press the [ENTER] key, and the Information popup screen will disappear. 9 Explanation Note The Information (version display) can be operated only with the function key. BER Measurement 9-39

289 Gbit/s Optical Receiver Returning to the Factory Default Settings Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (Figs. used in the descriptions show the DETAIL screen.) 2. With the [CHAN] key, select Optical Receiver for the current module. 3. Press <Preset>. 4. The Preset popup screen will appear. Press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. The Preset popup screen will disappear, and then the Optical Modulator is returned to its factory default settings. Explanation Note The Preset (factory default setting) can be operated only with the function key. For details about factory default setting (initial setting) values (page 11-14). To exit the popup screen without changing of settings, press the [CANCEL] key or <Cancel>. 9-40

290 9.5 XFP Interface Module Display Screen This section describes the display contents of the SUMMARY screen and DETAIL screen. SUMMARY Screen Output Shows the Output Status of XFP Transceiver Alarm Shows the Alarm of XFP Transceiver DETAIL Screen Displays the temperature inside the XFP Transceiver, the I/O optical level, and other information. Output Shows the Output Status of XFP Transceiver 9 Alarm Shows the Alarm of XFP Transceiver Mod_NR (Module Not Ready) Indication Status Green Mod_NR terminal signal level is L Red Mod_NR terminal signal level is H BER Measurement Rx_LOS Indication Green Red Interrupt Indication Green Red Status Rx_LOS terminal signal level is L Rx_LOS terminal signal level is H Status Interrupt terminal signal level is L Interrupt terminal signal level is H 9-41

291 9.5 XFP Interface Module Soft Key Menu Name Output Unit VCC5 VCC3 VCC2 VEE5 Infomation Preset XFP Info XFP Data XFP Alarm Function Turning ON/OFF the XFP Transceiver Output Selects the Power display unit Sets the Power Supply (5V) of XFP Transceiver Sets the Power Supply (3.3V) of XFP Transceiver Sets the Power Supply (1.8V) of XFP Transceiver Sets the Power Supply (-5.2V) of XFP Transceiver Shows the version information of XFP Interface Module Returning Module to the Initial Values Shows information of the XFP Transceiver Shows the contents of the internal memory of the XFP Transceiver Shows the alarm information that is written to the XFP transceiver s memory Analog Signal Monitor Function You can monitor analog signals to and from MSA (multi source agreement) compliant XFP Transceivers. Name Function Module Temp Internal temperature Tx Bias Current Transmission bias current Tx Output Power Transmission output power level Rx Input Power Receive input power level APD Bias Volt* APD bias voltage value TEC Current* Current of TEC Laser Temp* Laser temperature Laser WL* Laser wavelength +5V Voltage* VCC5 voltage value +3.3V Voltage* VCC3 voltage value +1.8V Voltage* VCC2 voltage value -5.2V Voltage* VEE5 voltage value +5V Current* VCC5 current value +3.3V Current* VCC3 current value +1.8V Current* VCC2 current value -5.2V Current* VEE5 current value * Due to the XFP Transceiver, the type of monitor supported is different. AUX1 or AUX2 is displayed if the monitor function is not supported, or if the XFP transceiver module is not installed. Power Supply Monitor Function You can monitor the XFP Interface Module's power supply. Name VCC5 VCC3 VCC2 VEE5 Function VCC5 Monitor Value VCC3 Monitor Value VCC2 Monitor Value VEE5 Monitor Value * Due to the XFP Transceiver, the type of monitor supported is different. Note For I2C communication with the XFP transceiver, packet error check is enabled (write-protected). 9-42

292 Turning ON/OFF the XFP Transceiver Output Procedure 9.5 XFP Interface Module To turn ON or OFF the XFP Transceiver Output, two setting methods are provided. Select a desired setting method corresponding to the application. Follow the steps below to turn ON or OFF the Output. Additionally, as the Output is turned ON, the LED on the light source panel will be lit. <Setting through the Panel of the XFP Interface Module> Press the [OUTPUT] key on the Interface Module panel to switch the light source between ON and OFF. <Setting through the Panel of the Frame Controller> 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object XFP Interface module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Opt> or move the cursor using the cursor key to Opt and press the [ENTER] key. 4. The Output popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to either of ON or OFF and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 9 BER Measurement Note The Output box displays the current setting status. The ON/OFF setting cannot be entered even if the cursor is moved to Output. 9-43

293 9.5 XFP Interface Module Changing the Power Display Unit You can switch the power display unit between the dbm display and mw display. Procedure 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object XFP Interface module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <Unit>. 4. The Unit popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Power and press the [ENTER] key. 9-44

294 9.5 XFP Interface Module Changing the Power Supply of the XFP Transceiver You can supply power to the XFP transceiver compliant with the MSA stipulations. Note that these voltages value can be varied. VCC5 (+5 V) VCC3 (+3.3 V) VCC2 (+1.8 V) VEE5 (-5.2 V) Procedure Changing the VCC5 (+5 V) 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object XFP Interface module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <VCC5> or move the cursor using the cursor key to V and press the [ENTER] key. Current Power Supply Value Displays the Monitor Value 9 4. The VCC5 popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. BER Measurement Note This can be set even if an XFP Transceiver is not installed. The voltage range of the XFP Transceiver is 4.70 to

295 9.5 XFP Interface Module Changing the VCC3 (+3.3 V) 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object XFP Interface module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <VCC3> or move the cursor using the cursor key to V and press the [ENTER] key. Current Power Supply Value Displays the Monitor Value 4. The VCC3 popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note This can be set even if an XFP Transceiver is not installed. The voltage range of the XFP Transceiver is 3.10 to

296 9.5 XFP Interface Module Changing the VCC2 (+1.8 V) 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object XFP Interface module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <VCC2> or move the cursor using the cursor key to V and press the [ENTER] key. Current Power Supply Value Displays the Monitor Value 4. The VCC2 popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 9 Note This can be set even if an XFP Transceiver is not installed. The voltage range of the XFP Transceiver is 1.70 to BER Measurement 9-47

297 9.5 XFP Interface Module Changing the VEE5 (-5.2 V) 1. Press the [DETAIL] key to display the DETAIL screen or SUMMARY screen. (The following describes the operation on the DETAIL screen.) 2. Select an object XFP Interface module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 3. Press <VEE5> or move the cursor using the cursor key to V and press the [ENTER] key. Current Power Supply Value Displays the Monitor Value 4. The VEE5 popup screen will appear. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note This can be set even if an XFP Transceiver is not installed. The voltage range of the XFP Transceiver is to

298 9.5 XFP Interface Module Displaying Information about the XFP Transceiver You can display the vendor name and parts number, etc., of MSA (multi source agreement) compliant XFP Transceivers. 1. Press <XFP Info>. The XFP Info popup screen will appear. ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** Note If an XFP Transceiver is not installed, the XFP Info soft key is dimmed. 9 BER Measurement 9-49

299 9.5 XFP Interface Module Displaying XFP Transceiver Internal Alarm Information An alarm is detected inside the XFP Transceiver when Interrupt under Alarm is red. When this happens, you can display the alarm information that is written to the XFP Transceiver s memory. 1. Press <Int Alarm>. The Int Alarm popup screen will appear. Note If an XFP Transceiver is not installed, the XFP Info soft key is dimmed. 9-50

300 Displaying the Contents of the XFP Transceiver s Internal Memory You can display the contents of the internal memory of MSA (multi source agreement) compliant XFP Transceivers. The memory display consists of a lower table (Address 0-127h) and upper table (Address h). The Upper Table consists of multiple tables, and you can select the tables to display. Note that aside from page 1 of the upper table (XFP information), the other pages (page 2 and thereafter) are password-protected and therefore require you to enter the manufacturer specified password in order to display them. Starting the Memory Display Screen 1. Press <XFP Data>. The memory data display screen opens. 9.5 XFP Interface Module Page number of the Upper Table 9 BER Measurement Data of the Lower Table (Address00-7Fh) Data of the Upper Table (Address 80-FFh) Select the Lower Table or Upper Table using the cursor keys ( ). The background color of the selected table changes to blue. You can scroll the memory data display area using the cursor keys ( ). 9-51

301 9.5 XFP Interface Module Switching the Upper Table Display 2. Press <Page Select>. The Password screen will appears. 3. Use the cursor keys ( ) to select a value 0 F, and the ( ) keys to select the digit. Enter the eight-character password with the ten-key pad and press <OK> or [ENTER] key. If the password is verified, the Page Select screen will appears. Note Characters entered are identified by asterisks (*). 4. Use the cursor keys ( ) to select a value 0 F, and the ( ) keys to select the digit. Enter the two-digit page number to display with the ten-key pad. Example: For page 2, enter 02. Note The following message appears if the password is incorrect, or if the specified page number cannot be selected. Check the setting again. 9-52

302 Chapter 10 Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions By saving or loading the set parameters into/from the storage device, you can reproduce the set parameters. Saving the Parameters for the Frame Controller You must save the parameters by the frame controller or measurement module type. Follow the steps below to save the necessary parameters of the frame controller or module. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key. The SYSTEM screen will appear. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Save Setting and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Select Storage popup screen will appear. 3. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a storage device, to which you want to save the data, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Save Filename popup screen will appear. 10 Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions 10-1

303 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions 4. Inputting a Character String, and then press <OK> after input a file name of the save file. For details, see section 3.8. At this time, when pressing <Cancel>, the file names saved in the storage device are displayed, allowing you to save the data by specifying an existing file name. The file name input screen The other file name input screen Note If the same file name already exists in the storage device, the Question popup screen appear after pressing <OK>. To overwrite the data, press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. To save the data with another file name, press the <Cancel> or [CANCEL] key, and then input another file name again. Data Overwrite Confirmation Screen 10-2

304 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions 5. When the Caution popup screen disappears, the parameter save operation is completed. CAUTION Parameter Save in Progress Popup Screen appears while the data is being written into the storage device. Never attempt to remove the storage device while this popup screen is being displayed. At this time, if the storage device is removed, this may cause the storage device to break. Parameter Save in Progress Popup Screen Note Temporary data (data temporarily stored in memory) is cleared when the power is turned OFF. To save this data, use the USB storage function or LAN FTP function. Loading Saved Parameters for the Frame Controller The parameters have been saved by the frame controller or measurement module type. Follow the steps below to load the necessary parameters of the frame controller or module. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key. The SYSTEM screen will appear. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Load Setting and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Select Memory popup screen will appear. 10 Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions 10-3

305 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions 3. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a storage device, to which you want to load the data, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Load Filename popup screen will appear. 4. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a parameter setting file you want to load and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. When the Caution popup screen disappears, the parameter load operation is completed. CAUTION Parameter Load in Progress Popup Screen appears while the data is being loaded from the storage device. Never attempt to remove the storage device while this popup screen is being displayed. At this time, if the storage device is removed, this may cause the storage device to break. Parameter Load in Progress Popup Screen 10-4

306 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions Saving the Parameters for the Module The parameters for the module are saved into the storage device. 1. Set a module, for which you want to save the parameters, to the current module. 2. Press the [MENU] key. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. 3. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Save Setting and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Select Memory popup screen will appear. 4. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a storage device, to which you want to save the data, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Save Filename popup screen will appear. 10 Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions 10-5

307 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions 5. Inputting a Character String, and then press <OK> after input a file name of the save file. For details, see section 3.8. At this time, when pressing <Cancel>, the file names saved in the storage device are displayed, allowing you to save the data by specifying an existing file name. The file name input screen The other file name input screen Note If you attempt to save the data with the same file name as that existing in the storage device, the Question popup screen appears after pressing <OK>. To overwrite the data, press <OK>. To save the data with another file name, press <Cancel>, and then input another file name again. 6. When the Caution popup screen disappears, the parameter save operation is completed. CAUTION Parameter Save in Progress Popup Screen appears while the data is being written into the storage device. Never attempt to remove the storage device while this popup screen is being displayed. At this time, if the storage device is removed, this may cause the storage device to break. Note Temporary data (data temporarily stored in memory) is cleared when the power is turned OFF. To save this data, use the USB storage function or LAN FTP function. 10-6

308 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions Loading the Parameters for the Module The parameters set for the module are loaded from the storage device. 1. Set a module you want to set the parameters to the current module. 2. Press <MENU>. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. 3. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Load Setting and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Select Memory popup screen will appear. 4. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a storage device, to which you want to load the data, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Load Filename popup screen will appear. 5. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a parameter setting file you want to load and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note On the Load Filename screen, only file names of the modules, the model of which is the same as that of the current module, are displayed. 10 Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions 10-7

309 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions 6. When the Caution popup screen disappears, the parameter load operation is completed. CAUTION Parameter Load in Progress Popup Screen appears while the data is being loaded from the storage device. Never attempt to remove the storage device while this popup screen is being displayed. At this time, if the storage device is removed, this may cause the storage device to break. Parameter Load in Progress Popup Screen Note If the software version when the parameters have been saved is different from the current software version, the Soft Version Mismatch popup screen will appear. At this time, when pressing the <Cancel> or [Cancel] key, the parameters are loaded. However, the parameters, which have been added by updating the software, may not be loaded. In this case, the Soft Version Error popup screen will appear when loading the parameters. For details about how to update the firmware version to the latest version, see sections Soft Version Mismatch Popup Screen Soft Version Error Popup Screen 10-8

310 Measurement Conditions for Saving and Loading 1. AQ2201/AQ2202 Frame Controller 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions SYSTEM mode setting GP-IB Address Network Set Trigger Display Volume Stability mode setting Data Points Average Input Trigger Unit Total Time Reference Modulation Logging mode setting Data Points Average Input Trigger Unit Reference Function Key user setting by module type Parameter user setting by module type User Key user setting by module type 2. AQ DFB-LD Module Wavelength Mod Source Line Width PL Offset Unit Attenuation Mod Frequency WL Offset Power 3. AQ FP-LD Module Attenuation Mod Frequency Power Mod Source PL Offset Unit 4. AQ DUAL FP-LD Module Attenuation1 Mod Source PL Offset1 Power1 Unit 5. AQ Interface Module None 6. AQ Sensor Module Meas Mode Max/Min Mode Calibration Unit Range Mode Modulation Analog Out Attenuation2 Mod Frequency PL Offset2 Power2 Average Data Points Reference Wavelength Disp Resolution Range Output Trigger 10 Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions 10-9

311 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions 7. AQ Sensor Module Meas Mode Max/Min Mode Calibration Unit Range Mode Modulation Analog Out Average Data Points Reference Wavelength Disp Resolution Range Output Trigger 8. AQ Sensor Module Meas Mode Max/Min Mode Ref Mode Calibration Unit Range Mode Output Trigger Average Data Points Reference Wavelength Disp Resolution Range 9. AQ /-241 Optical Sensor Head Meas Mode Max/Min Mode Ref Mode Calibration Unit Range Mode Modulation Analog Out Average Data Points Reference Wavelength Disp Resolution Range Output Trigger 10. AQ ATTN Module ATT Offset Wavelength Attenuation 11. AQ A ATTN Module ATT Offset Wavelength Attenuation 12. AQ ATTN Module ATT Offset Wavelength Output StartUP Unit Average Attenuation Output Power Set PL Offset 13. AQ /412/421 OSW Module Route 10-10

312 Cautions about Loading of Application Parameters For application (stability and logging) parameters you have loaded, the reproducing of the parameters is partially limited or the parameters cannot be reproduced completely according to the actually mounted sensor and/or selection of the sensor used for the application. Sensor Selected Sensor Configuration Sensor Mounting Position 10.1 Saving and Loading the Measurement Conditions 1 A A A Parameters you have saved are reproduced completely. 2 A B A/B Common parameters are reproduced. Individual parameters can be reproduced if the same sensor model is mounted in the same slot as those used when saving the parameters. However, if the sensor mounting position is different, the default settings apply to the parameters. 3 A A C Common parameters are reproduced, but individual parameters become default settings. 4 A C - Both common parameters and individual parameters become default settings. 5 B/C - - Both common parameters and individual parameters become default settings. A: Loaded parameters are completely the same as those saved. B: Loaded parameters are partially the same as those saved. C: Loaded parameters are completely different from those saved. Note Common parameters mean the parameters common to all selected sensors. Individual parameters mean the parameters set in the Individual mode. 10 Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions 10-11

313 10.2 Deleting the File Clearing Saved Data 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key. The SYSTEM screen will appear. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to File Delete and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Select Memory popup screen will appear. 3. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a storage device, which contains the data, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The File Delete popup screen will appear. 4. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a file name you want to clear and press the <Delete> or [ENTER] key. The popup screen prompting you to confirm the data deletion will appear. When deleting the file name you have selected, press <OK>. To delete all displayed files at the same time, press <All Delete>

314 5. The Question popup screen appears. Press the <OK> or [ENTER] key to delete the file. If you do not want to delete the file, press the <Cancel> or [CANCEL] key Deleting the File Deleting Saved Parameters You can delete a parameter file saved in the storage device on the parameter file selection screen. 1. Set a module, for which you want to save the parameters, to the current module. 2. Press the [MENU] key. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. 3. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Load Setting or Save Setting, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4. On the load file selection screen or save file name selection screen, move the cursor using the cursor key to a file name you want to delete and press <Delete>. Load File Selection Screen 10 Save File Name Selection Screen Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions 10-13

315 10.2 Deleting the File 5. The Question popup screen appears. Press the <OK> or [ENTER] key to delete the file. If you do not want to delete the file, press the <Cancel> or [CANCEL] key. CAUTION Do not remove the storage device until the popup screen disappears and the screen changes to the parameter file selection screen after pressing <Delete> and <OK> in that order. If the storage device is removed during data deletion, this may cause the storage device to break

316 10.3 Selecting a Storage Device When connecting this unit to the PC with the USB cable, you can use the internal memory of this unit, mounted USB flash memory card, or compact flash memory device as a storage device. For information on the connection between the instrument and PC, see section 2.8, Control Function. Selecting a Memory for the Connection Destination 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key. The SYSTEM screen will appear. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Storage Memory and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Select Memory popup screen will appear. 3. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a memory you want to use it as a storage device and press <OK> or [ENTER]. If connected this unit to the PC with the USB cable, the screen for USB storage operations appears. 10 This screen is displayed continuously while the unit is being operated as storage device. Saving, Loading and Deleting the Measurement Conditions USB Storage Running Screen 10-15

317 Chapter 11 Setting the System 11.1 Setting the Date and Time Changing the Date Follow the steps below to change the date. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Date and press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key. 3. With the ten-key pad, or the cursor key, change the Christian year, month, and day, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note When inputting a value with the ten-key pad, the cursor is automatically moved to the Year, Month, and Day fields in that order. However, when the Month is 1, the Day does not move automatically according to the day of the month. In this case, move the cursor with the cursor key. If you attempt to input a date not existing in the calendar, it is automatically corrected or the operation enters the input disabled status. (Example 1) When changing December, 31 to November, 31, the value in the Day field is automatically corrected to 30 if the value in the Month field is changed to 11. (Example 2) When the value in the Month field is 2, 30 cannot be input in the Day field. 11 Setting the System 11-1

318 11.1 Setting the Date and Time Changing the Time Follow the steps below to change the time. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Time and press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key. 3. With the ten-key pad, or the cursor key, change the hour, minute, and second, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note When inputting a value with the ten-key pad, the cursor is automatically moved to the Hour, Minute, and Second fields in that order. However, the cursor does not move automatically when the Hour is 1 or 2, or the Minute or Second is between 1 and 5. In this case, move the cursor with the cursor key. 11-2

319 11.2 Setting the Network Changing the GP-IB Address When two or more number of devices are connected, a different GP-IB address needs to be set for each device. Follow the steps below to set the GP-IB address. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to GP-IB Address and press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key. 3. With the ten-key pad, or the cursor key, change the address. 4. After inputting the new address, press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note The address setting range is 0 to 30. The initial value has been set at 20 before shipment from the factory. 11 Setting the System 11-3

320 11.2 Setting the Network Changing the Network Address A different network address needs to be set for each unit in order to identify the units to be connected to the network. Follow the steps below to set a network address. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Network Set and press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key. 3. Move the cursor to IP Address, SubNetmask, Gateway, or Port, and press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key to select it. Press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key. You can set the value. 4. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 5. Repeat above steps 3 and 4 to input all parameters. 6. After you have input all parameters completely, press the <Close> or [CANCEL] key. Note When inputting the numeric value with the ten-key pad, the cursor is moved automatically after inputting a 3-digit value in each field. However, if a numeric value having two or less digits is input, the cursor is not moved automatically. At this time, move the cursor with the cursor key (, ) in the same manner as described for data inputting with the cursor key (, ). To make the numeric values you have input valid, turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again. 11-4

321 11.3 Locking the Laser Output Locking the Laser Output By locking the laser output, it is possible to protect the operation by a third person. Follow the steps to lock the laser output. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Lock and press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key. 3. The Password popup screen will appear. Input the password with the ten-key pad and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4. The Lock popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to ON or OFF and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 11 Setting the System 11-5

322 11.3 Locking the Laser Output Note If any of the following modules is not mounted, this parameter cannot be displayed. Model AQ AQ AQ AQ Name DFB-LD Module TLS Module FP-LD Module DUAL FP-LD Module Setting or Changing the Password You can set a password intended to lock or cancel the laser output. Follow the steps below to set a desired password. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Password and press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key. 3. Input the currently set password with the ten-key pad and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. If the password you have input is not matched with that currently set in the unit, relevant error is shown. If this happens, input the password again. 11-6

323 11.3 Locking the Laser Output Error message 11 Setting the System 11-7

324 4. When the password you have input is matched with that set in the unit, the message, NEW PASSWORD, appears and the screen is changed to the new password input screen. Input a new password (4-digit numeric value ranging from 0000 to 9999 ) with the ten-key pad and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Input a new password 5. The message, NEW PASSWORD VERIFY, appears. Input the new password you have input in step 4 again, and then press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Input the new password again with the ten-key pad. 6. When the new password you have input in step 5 is matched with that set in step 4, the new password setup is then completed. CAUTION If the password is not matched, you cannot perform the lock operation. If you have changed the password, you must record this password. If you forget the password, contact your local sales dealer or YOKOGAWA s sales branch office. Note The password has been set at 1234 before shipment from the factory. 11-8

325 11.4 Read Out the System Condition 11.4 Read Out the System Condition Checking the Frame Conditions You can check three kinds of frame conditions, FAN drive, Battery, and Internal temperature. Follow the steps below to check the frame condition. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Condition Check and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 3. The START popup screen will appear. Press the <OK> or [ENTER] key to start the condition check. 4. When the screen is changed to that shown in the Fig. below, the condition check is then completed. 11 Check results are shown. Setting the System 11-9

326 CAUTION The internal temperature is abnormal if NG is displayed for TEMPERATURE. Turn OFF the power immediately, and check that ventilation holes (e.g. fan exhaust holes) are not blocked. If NG still reappears, contact your local sales dealer or YOKOGAWA s sales branch office. The fan is not operating properly if NG is displayed for FAN ALARM. Check the fan for entry of any foreign matter. If NG still reappears, contact your local sales dealer or YOKOGAWA s sales branch office. The remaining backup battery power is low if the BATTERY bar becomes short. Record all the important parameters and data immediately. If it is necessary to replace the battery, contact your local sales dealer or YOKOGAWA s sales branch office. The battery lasts approximately three years with the power to the instrument turned OFF

327 11.5 Setting the Display 11.5 Setting the Display Adjusting the Display You can adjust the contrast, brightness, and back-light of the display. Follow the steps below to adjust the display. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Display and press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key. 3. Move the cursor to Contrast, Brightness, or Back Light with the cursor key and press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key to select a desired parameter. Move the cursor to a desired parameter with the cursor key. 4. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 11 Input a numeric value with the cursor key. Setting the System 11-11

328 11.5 Setting the Display 5. Repeat above steps 3 and 4 to input all parameters. After you have input all parameters completely, press the <Close> or [CANCEL] key. Changing the Buzzer Sound Volume In the key operation, when the key you have pressed is recognized, the buzzer will sound. You can adjust this buzzer sound volume. Follow the steps below to set the sound volume to a desired level. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Volume and press the <Edit> or [ENTER] key. 3. Change the numeric value with the ten-key pad or the cursor key, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note When 0 is set, the buzzer is turned OFF

329 11.5 Setting the Display Assigning the User Keys You can assign the functions of the function keys of each module to the user keys ([USER1], [USER2], and [USER3]). By assigning the functions to the hard keys, you can select the function of the current module with one button operation and without changing of the function key page. Note The user key assignments are grouped by the module model. Even though the insertion slots are different, the same assignments can be used when the same module model is used. List window User key assignment parameters. Assigned functions are shown. If a user key is blank, this shows that no function is assigned. <SET USER1>: Assigns the function at the cursor position in the list window to [USER1]. <SET USER2>: Assigns the function at the cursor position in the list window to [USER2]. <SET USER3>: Assigns the function at the cursor position in the list window to [USER3]. <Erase USER1>: Cancels the assignment of [USER1]. <Erase USER2>: Cancels the assignment of [USER2]. <Erase USER3>: Cancels the assignment of [USER3]. 11 Setting the System 11-13

330 11.5 Setting the Display 1. Set a module you want to set for the user key to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 2. Press <Menu>. 3. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to User key and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4. The screen changes to the Custom User key screen. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a function in the list window you want to assign it to the user key and press <SET USER>. <SET USER> shows any function key of <SET USER1> to <SET USER3>. Select a function you want to assign. Press <SET USER > to set the assignment of the function you have selected. 5. Close the user key assignment function. Press <Close>. Return to the previous screen. To cancel the edit, press <Cancel>

331 Canceling the User Key Assignments 1. Set a module you want to set for the user key to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 2. Press <Menu> Setting the Display 3. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to User key and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4. The screen changes to the Custom User key screen. Press <Erase USER> for the user key you want to cancel the assignment. <Erase USER> shows any function key of <Erase USER1> to <Erase USER3>. Press < Erase USER > to cancel the assignment of USER. 11 Setting the System 11-15

332 11.5 Setting the Display Additionally, press the cursor key ( ) to move the cursor to the parameter assigned to the user key. Select USER with the curosor key (, ) and press <Erase>. This operation can also cancel the assignment

333 11.5 Setting the Display Customizing the Display Screen The display order of the function keys and parameters on the DETAIL screen or SUMMERY screen can be changed by the module type. Additionally, the display module name can also be changed. You can change the display to that you can operate easily corresponding to the application. You can select a desired display order of function keys from four kinds of patterns. Since one of four patterns is set as default setting, this pattern cannot be changed, but rest three patterns can be changed freely as required. You must select or set a display order suitable for the application. Selecting a Display Order of Function Keys You can select a desired display order of function keys from the following four function display patterns. Default (Display order is fixed and it cannot be changed.) Custom1 (Display order can be changed to a desired order.) Custom2 (Display order can be changed to a desired order.) Custom3 (Display order can be changed to a desired order.) Follow the steps below to select a desired display order. 1. Using the [CHAN] key, set the module that sets the function key display order as the current module. 2. Press <Menu>. 3. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Function key and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 11 Setting the System 11-17

334 11.5 Setting the Display 4. The screen changes to the Custom Function key screen and the Select popup screen will appear. At this time, the cursor on the Select popup screen shows the currently specified function display pattern. When the cursor is moved to a function display pattern name on the Select popup screen, the function display order set for this pattern is shown in the setup display window. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired function display pattern and press <Close>. Select a desired function display pattern name with the cursor key

335 Changing the Display Order of Function Keys You can set a desired display pattern about the display order of the function keys for each of Custom1, Custom2, and Custom3. The display order can be changed through two kinds of setup screens shown below. <Function Deletion Screen> Selection cursor 11.5 Setting the Display Default window Setup display window <Function Addition Screen> Selection cursor Default window Setup display window Default window: Setup display window: Selection cursor: <Erase>: The list of functions is displayed in the default display order. Normal and dim character string colors are provided. The normal character string color shows the items not set in the setup display window while the dim character string color shows the items set in the setup display window. Set functions are displayed in the ascending order. All items set in the default window must be set in this window. <Erase>, <Set>, and [ENTER] operate the function at this cursor position. Shown only on the function deletion screen. The function at the selection cursor is deleted from the setup display window. The same operation also happens when you press the [ENTER] key. 11 Setting the System 11-19

336 11.5 Setting the Display <Erase All>: <Set>: <Re-store>: Cursor key ( ): Cursor key ( ): Shown only on the function deletion screen. All functions displayed in the setup display window are deleted from the setup display window. Shown only on the function addition screen. The function at the selection cursor is added to a position before the cursor item in the setup display window. The same operation also happens when you press the [ENTER] key. Shown only on the function addition screen. The functions in the default window are directly set to the setup display window as they are. Switches the screen between the function addition screen and function deletion screen. Moves the selection cursor up or down. The following describes operating procedures with the AQ DFB-LD Module used as an example. <Registering the Order with <Power> Put at the Top of the Function Key into Custom1> 1. Set the AQ DFB-LD module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 2. Press <Menu>. 3. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Function key and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key

337 4. The screen changes to the Custom Function key screen and the Select popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Custom1 and press <Edit> Setting the Display 5. The function deletion screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Power in the set function list and press the <Erase> or [ENTER] key. Power is then deleted from the set function list. Press the <Erase> or [ENTER] key to delete Power. 6. Move the cursor to the top position. Move the cursor to the top position with the cursor key. 11 Setting the System 11-21

338 11.5 Setting the Display 7. Press the cursor key ( ) to move the cursor to the default window on the function addition screen. Move the cursor to Power and press the <Set> or [ENTER] key. Power is then set at a position before the cursor, which has been moved in step Press <Close> to complete the setting. Power is set at the top, and then the setting is completed

339 11.5 Setting the Display Selecting a Display Order of Parameters You can select a desired display order of parameters from the following four parameter display patterns. Default (Display order is fixed and it cannot be changed.) Custom1 (Display order can be changed to a desired order.) Custom2 (Display order can be changed to a desired order.) Custom3 (Display order can be changed to a desired order.) Follow the steps below to select a desired display order. 1. Using the [CHAN] key, set the module that sets the parameter display order as the current module. 2. Press <Menu>. 3. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Parameter and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 11 Setting the System 11-23

340 11.5 Setting the Display 4. The screen changes to the Custom Parameter screen and the Select popup screen will appear. At this time, the cursor on the Select popup screen shows the currently specified parameter display pattern. When the cursor is moved to a parameter display pattern name on the Select popup screen, the parameter display order set for this pattern is shown in the setup display window. Move the cursor using the cursor key to a desired parameter display pattern and press <Close>

341 Changing the Display Order of Parameters You can set a desired display pattern about the display order of the parameters for each of Custom1, Custom2, and Custom3. The display order can be changed through two kinds of setup screens shown below. <Parameter Deletion Screen> Selection cursor 11.5 Setting the Display Default window Setup display window <Parameter Addition Screen> Selection cursor Default window Setup display window Default window: The list of parameters is displayed in the default display order. Normal and dim character string colors are provided. The normal character string color shows the items not set in the setup display window while the dim character string color shows the items set in the setup display window. Note that the display order of the major parameters displayed on the SUMMARY screen cannot be changed. Therefore, such parameters are not displayed in this window. Setup display window: Set parameters are displayed in the ascending order. All items set in the default window must be set in this window. Selection cursor: <Erase>, <Set>, and [ENTER] operate the parameter at this cursor position. <Erase>: Shown only on the parameter deletion screen. The parameter at the selection cursor is deleted from the setup display window. The same operation also happens when you press the [ENTER] key. 11 Setting the System 11-25

342 11.5 Setting the Display <Erase All>: <Set>: <Re-store>: Cursor key ( ): Cursor key ( ): Shown only on the parameter deletion screen. All parameters displayed in the setup display window are deleted from the setup display window. Shown only on the parameter addition screen. The parameter at the selection cursor is added to a position before the cursor item in the setup display window. The same operation also happens when you press the [ENTER] key. Shown only on the parameter addition screen. The parameters in the default window are directly set to the setup display window as they are. Switches the screen between the parameter addition screen and parameter deletion screen. Moves the selection cursor up or down. The following describes operating procedures with the AQ DFB-LD Module used as an example. <Registering the Order with <WL Offset> Put at the Top of the Parameter into Custom1> 1. Set the AQ DFB-LD module to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 2. Press <Menu>. 3. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Parameter and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key

343 4. The screen changes to the Custom Parameter screen and the Select popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Custom1 and press <Edit> Setting the Display 5. The parameter deletion screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to WL Offset in the setup display window and press the <Erase> or [ENTER] key. WL Offset is then deleted from the setup display window. Press the <Erase> or [ENTER] key to delete WL Offset. 6. Move the cursor using the cursor key to the top position. Move the cursor to the top position with the cursor key. 11 Setting the System 11-27

344 11.5 Setting the Display 7. Press the cursor key ( ) to display the parameter addition screen. Move the cursor to WL Offset and press the <Set> or [ENTER] key. WL Offset is then set before the parameter at the cursor position, which has been moved in step Press <Close> to complete the setting. WL Offset is set at the top, and then the setting is completed

345 Changing the Display Module Name You can set a desired name suitable for the purpose or application for each slot. Display module name 11.5 Setting the Display Change the display module name. 1. Set a module of which the display module name you want to change to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 2. Press <Menu>. 11 Setting the System 11-29

346 3. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Module Name and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 4. The Module Name popup screen will appear. Change the display module name. For details, see section 3.8. Character string currently being input Note Even though the power is turned OFF, the set display module name is retained. However, if the slot is changed, the set display module name is also changed to the default display (product name)

347 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings Various settings of the frame controller and mounted module are returned to the initial values. Returning All the Frame Controller and Mounted Modules to the Initial Values 1. Press the [PRESET] key. 2. The Preset popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to All and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Returning Only the Frame Controller to the Initial Values 1. Press the [PRESET] key. 2. The Preset popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Main Frame and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 11 Setting the System 11-31

348 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings Returning All the Mounted Modules to the Initial Values 1. Press the [PRESET] key. 2. The Preset popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to All Module and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Returning Individual Mounted Module to the Initial Values (All modules except for XFP Interface Module) 1. Set a module you want to initialize to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 2. Press <Menu>. 3. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Module Preset and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Note During initialization, the Executing shortcut menu is displayed

349 Returning XFP Interface Module to the Initial Values 1. Select an object XFP Interface module for the current module with the [CHAN] key. 2. Press <Preset> Returning the Initial Settings Unit Infomation Preset More 3/3 Note During initialization, the Executing shortcut menu is displayed. 11 Setting the System 11-33

350 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings List of Default Settings AQ2201/AQ2202 Frame Controller Default Settings Item Set Value Display Contrast 80 Volume 5 Screen mode Current module Function key display order Parameter display order User key display order Brightness 50 Back Light 70 SUMMARY screen Smallest slot No. Default Default Default Stability Selected Modules None Average *1 100 ms Total Time*1 00:10:00 Data Points *1 600 WL Mode*2 Wavelength *2 Range Mode *2 Range *2 Unit *1 Ref Mode *1 Reference *1 Input Trigger *1 Modulation *1 Depending on the selected sensor 850 nm or 1310 nm Auto Auto dbm Value dbm Ignore CW Logging Selected Modules None Average *1 100 ms Data Points *1 600 WL Mode *2 Wavelength *2 Range Mode *2 Range *2 Unit *1 Ref Mode *1 Reference *1 Input Trigger *1 Depending on the selected sensor 850 nm or 1310 nm Depending on the selected sensor Depending on the selected sensor dbm Value dbm Ignore ORL Ref 14.7 db *1 Common parameters *2 Individual parameters Average Wavelength 1 s ORL display resolution 1/10 IL display resolution 1/100 Selected Modules 850 nm or 1310 nm In order of installed sensors starting from the lowest slot number 11-34

351 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings AQ DFB-LD Module Default Settings Item Set Value Optical Output OFF Wavelength Specified wavelength Attenuation 0.00 db Mod Source OFF Mod Frequency 0.27 khz Line Width Narrow WL Offset nm Unit nm, dbm PL Offset 0.00 db Display module name AQ DFB-LD MODULE AQ FP-LD Module Default Settings Item Set Value Optical Output OFF Attenuation 0.00 db Mod Source OFF Mod Frequency 270 Hz Unit nm, dbm PL Offset 0.00 db Display module name AQ FP-LD MODULE AQ DUAL FP-LD Module Default Settings Item Set Value Optical Output1,2 OFF Attenuation1, db Mod Source OFF Mod Frequency 270 Hz Unit nm, dbm PL Offset 0.00 db Display module name AQ DUAL FP-LD MODULE AQ Sensor Module Default Settings Item Set Value Measure Mode Normal Average 100 ms Data Points 1,000 Reference Mode Value Reference(dBm) dbm Calibration db Wavelength nm Unit dbm Display Resolution 1/10000 Range Mode AUTO Modulation CW Output Trigger Disable Analog Out AUTO MaxMin Mode Off Maximum Level +13 dbm Power range 24 db Display module name AQ SENSOR MODULE 11 Setting the System 11-35

352 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings AQ Sensor Module Default Settings Item Set Value Measure Mode Normal Average 100 ms Data Points 1,000 Reference Mode Value Reference(dBm) dbm Calibration db Wavelength nm Unit dbm Display Resolution 1/10000 Range Mode AUTO Modulation CW Output Trigger Disable Analog Out AUTO MaxMin Mode Off Maximum Level +33 dbm Power range 24dB Display module name AQ SENSOR MODULE AQ Sensor Module Default Settings Item Set Value Measure Mode Normal Average 100 ms Data Points 1,000 Reference Mode Value Reference(dBm) dbm Calibration db Wavelength nm Unit dbm Display Resolution 1/1000 Range Mode AUTO Output Trigger Disable MaxMin Mode Off Display module name AQ SENSOR MODULE 11-36

353 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings AQ Sensor Head Default Settings Item Set Value Measure Mode Normal Average 100 ms Data Points 1,000 Reference Mode Value Reference(dBm) dbm Calibration db Wavelength nm Unit dbm Display Resolution 1/10000 Range Mode AUTO Modulation CW Output Trigger Disable Analog Out AUTO MaxMin Mode Off Maximum Level +13 dbm Power range 24 db Display module name AQ SENSOR HEAD AQ Sensor Head Default Settings Item Set Value Measure Mode Normal Average 100 ms Data Points 1,000 Reference Mode Value Reference(dBm) dbm Calibration db Wavelength nm Unit dbm Display Resolution 1/10000 Range Mode AUTO Modulation CW Output Trigger Disable Analog Out AUTO MaxMin Mode Off Maximum Level +13 dbm Power range 24 db Display module name AQ SENSOR HEAD 11 AQ ATTN Module Default Settings Item Set Value Optical Output Disable Attenuation db Wavelength nm Att Offset db Output Start Disable Display module name AQ ATTN MODULE Setting the System 11-37

354 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings AQ A ATTN Module Default Settings Item Set Value Optical Output Disable Attenuation db Wavelength nm Att Offset db Output Start Disable Display module name AQ A ATTN MODULE AQ ATTN Module Default Settings Item Set Value Optical Output Disable Attenuation db Wavelength Multi mode nm Single mode nm Att Offset db Power Set db Unit dbm Power Offset db Average 100 ms Output Start Disable Display module name AQ ATTN MODULE AQ OSW Module Default Settings Item Set Value Route A-1 Display module name AQ OSW MODULE AQ OSW Module Default Settings Item Set Value Route A-1 Display module name AQ OSW MODULE AQ OSW Module Default Settings Item Set Value Route A-1, B-2 Display module name AQ OSW MODULE 11-38

355 AQ TLS Module Default Settings Item Opt Set Value OFF Wavelength Df +0.0 GHz WL Ref Start WL Stop WL Step WL Power Sweep Cycles 1 Sweep Interval Dwell Time Sweep Mode Sweep Speed Linewidth Input Trig Output Trig MWL Settle OSA Sync Unit (Wavelength) Unit (Power) nm Since the minimum output level value within the setting range is displayed, each module has a different initial value. 0 sec 0.1 sec Continuous 50.0 nm/sec Narrow Ignore Disable OFF ON nm dbm 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings 11 Setting the System 11-39

356 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings AQ BERT Module (PPG) Default Settings Item Set Value Signal Output OFF Error add OFF Error mode Single Clock source Internal Divide ratio 1/16 Logic Positive PPG IF Electric Data amplitude 0.50 [Vpp] Data offset 0.00 [V] Data cross point 50 [%] Clock offset 0.00 [V] Setup Couple Pattern PRBS PRBS length PRBS7 Program length 16 [bit] Program length (long) 256 [bit] Program Pattern Data All 55 Payload PRBS9 Trigger TX1/16 AQ BERT Module (ED) Default Settings Item Set Value Data threshold DataIn 1 Input select DataIn 1 Measure mode Single Measure day 0 [day] Measure time 00 [h]:00 [m]:10 [s] Buzzer OFF Auto sync ON Logic Positive Setup Couple Pattern PRBS PRBS length PRBS7 Program length 16 [bit] Program length (long) 256 [bit] Program Pattern Data All 55 Payload PRBS9 Trigger TX1/16 AQ BERT Module (SG) Default Settings Item Set Value Bitrate [Gbit/s] Offset 0 [ppm] AQ BERT Module (BERT Appli) Default Settings Item Set Value Logging OFF Logging period 1 sec Logging mode Error only 11-40

357 AQ Gbit/S Optical Modulator (1.55um) Default Settings Item Set Value Remarks 11.6 Returning the Initial Settings Driver Gain 180 For 1.5 mm/x-cut 160 For 1.5 mm/z-cut Cross Point 0 ABC Slope Positive Auto Bias Ctrl ON LN Bias set 0.0 [V] AQ Gbit/S Optical Modulator (1.31um) Default Settings Item Set Value Remarks Driver Gain 150 For 1.3 mm/x-cut 130 For 1.3 mm/z-cut Cross Point 0 ABC Slope Positive Auto Bias Ctrl ON LN Bias set 0.0 [V] AQ Gbit/s Optical Receiver Default Settings Item Set Value Data threshold 0 Data output ON Wavelength 1.5 [mm] Overload -1.0 [dbm] LOS [dbm] AQ XFP Interface Module Default Settings Item Set Value Output OFF Password Page Select 01 VCC VCC VCC VEE Unit W 11 Setting the System 11-41

358 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspection 12.1 Troubleshooting If a message appears on the screen, read the following pages. If service is required, or the corrective action does not solve the problem, refer to yoursupplier. Trouble Probable Cause Corrective Action Related Section The power is not The power cable or connector is not Check the connections of the power cable and Section 3.2 turned ON. connected firmly. connector. If any cable or connector is loose, connect it firmly. The fuse is blown out. Check the fuse of the frame controller. If the fuse is blown out, replace it. The operation panel The unit is put in the remote mode. When <LOCAL> is indicated on the function key, Section 3.8 cannot be operated. this shows that the unit is in the remote mode, such as GP-IB. To operate the operation panel, cancel the remote mode from the remote controller or press <LOCAL> to put the unit in the local mode. The error message 1. No CF is inserted or the CF is 1. Insert a CF correctly. Section 10.1 No Media. or inserted incorrectly. Media is not found. 2. It takes a certain time to recognize 2. Wait for about 10 seconds after inserting a CF, appears. an inserted CF. then access to the CF. The synchronization The cable is not connected firmly. Check the cable connection. If any cable is Section 3.4 is not established. loose, connect it firmly. (BERT Module) The Interface setting of the PPG is Check the IF setting of the PPG. If the IF setting Section 6.5 in the not set at Electric. is set at Optic, change the setting to Electric. IM E The input port setting is incorrect. The PPG output is not ON. Check the input port settings (DATAIN1, DATAIN2) of the ED and actual connections. If the settings are different from the actual connections, make the settings matched with the connections. Check the Signal output. If the Signal output is OFF, change the output to ON. The setting of the PPG is not matched Check the DAT setting of the PPG and ED. If the with that of the ED. (Setting: Pattern, setting of the PPG is different from that of the ED, PRBS length, Program length, Logic, make these settings matched with each other. etc.) The amplitude of the data is small. The threshold value of the data is incorrect. When using DATAIN2, the data does not meet the phase of the clock. Check the value of the Data amplitude. If the amplitude is small, change the amplitude. Check the value of the Data threshold. If the threshold value is incorrect, set it correctly. When using DATAIN2, it is necessary to externally adjust the phase of the clock to be input using the phase shifter, etc. If the phase is not adjusted, adjust it using the phase shifter, etc. Error occurs. The pattern of the PPG is not matched Check the Pattern of the PPG and ED. If the Section 6.5 in the (BERT Module) with that of the ED. pattern of the PPG is not matched with that of IM E the ED, make them matched with each other. Error-add is ON. The amplitude of the data is small. Check the Error-add setting. If the Error-add setting is ON, change it to OFF. Check the value of the Data amplitude. If the amplitude is small, change it correctly. Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

359 12.1 Troubleshooting Trouble Probable Cause Corrective Action Related Section Error occurs. The threshold value of the data is Check the value of the Data threshold. If the Section 6.5 in the (BERT Module) incorrect. threshold value is incorrect, set it correctly. IM E The output waveform The cables are not connected firmly. Check the cable connections. If any cable is Section 3.4 is not clear. loose, connect it firmly. (BERT Module) The output terminal not in use is not Check the output terminal. If the output terminal Section 3.4 terminated. is open, terminate it using the terminator supplied with this unit. The cable and connector having Check the cable and connector. If the cable and - excellent high-frequency characteristics connector having excellent high-frequency are not used. characteristics is not used, replace it with a one having excellent high-frequency characteristics. The LOS alarm is The end face of the optical fiber is Check the end face of the optical fiber. If the end Section 3.7 displayed on the OE. contaminated. face of the optical fiber is contaminated, clean it (10 Gbit/s Optical completely. Modulator) The optical fiber is not connected firmly. Check the connection of the optical fiber. If the optical fiber is not connected firmly, connect it firmly. The optical input power of the OE is Check the optical input power of the OE. If the - the minimum light receiving sensitivity optical input power of the OE is the minimum or less. light receiving sensitivity or less, insert the optical AMP, etc. The output of the LD light source is Check the output status of the LD light source. - OFF. If the output status of the LD light source is OFF, change it to ON. The output power setting of the LD Check the output power setting of the LD light - light source is too low. source. If the setting is too low, set it to an appropriate level. The OVERLOAD The optical input power of the OE is Check the optical input power of the OE. If the - alarm is displayed too large. optical input power is too large, insert the optical on the OE. ATT for protection. (10 Gbit/s Optical Modulator) The sync loss error The Interface setting of the PPG is not Check the setting of the PPGIF. If the setting is Section 6.5 in the occurs. set at Optic. set at Electric, change it to Optic. IM E (10 Gbit/s Optical The output of the OE is not ON. Check the Data output of the OE. If this data Modulator/Receiver) output is OFF, change it to ON. The optical input power of the OE is Check the optical input power of the OE. If the - beyond the light receiving range level. optical input power is beyond the light receiving range level, insert the optical ATT or optical AMP so that the optical input power enters the light receiving range. The wavelength band of the LD is not Check the wavelength bands of the LD and EO. - matched with that of the EO. If the wavelength band of the LD is not matched with that of the EO, use a unit having proper wavelength band. The AQ of the EO is set to 1.5um-band and the AQ is set to 1.3um-band. The polarization direction of the PMF Use PMF, an optional device of the EO. Section 3.4 connecting the LD and EO is incorrect. The logic settings of the PPG and ED Set all settings to Positive once to check the Section 6.5 in the are conflict with the ABC slope settings operation. IM E of the EO. The threshold value of the OE data is Check the Data threshold value of the OE. incorrect. If the threshold value is incorrect, set it correctly. 12-2

360 Trouble Probable Cause Corrective Action Related Section No optical output Optical output is possibly locked. If the optical output is locked, LOCK appears (Light Source in the Opt filed on the display. Module) Move the cursor to Lock in the SYSTEM screen to switch to OFF. If OFF does not appear, the interlock connector on the rear panel of the unit is possibly open. Make sure that the interlock connector is shortcircuited. Cannot remember By default, the password is If the password is changed, you will not forget it. the password (Light Source Module) Troubleshooting If the Trouble Cannot Be Solved: If the cause cannot be located or if the faulty status cannot be restored to the original status, contact your local sales dealer, YOKOGAWA s sales department, or support department. Additionally, check the following items when contacting above department. 1. Unit name The unit name is shown on the nameplate attached to the front, rear, or side panel. 2. Software version of main unit Check the software version of the frame controller using the Information menu on the SYSTEM screen. 3. Software version of each module Check the software version of each module using the <Information> function key. 4. Symptom Operating environment you have used for this unit. Indoor/outdoor, temperature, or mounted module, etc. What trouble occurs in what operation. Freezing of the panel operation or remote control, etc. Settings you have used for this unit. Settings, etc. Message shown on the screen. Display screen or message, etc. 5. Trouble occurrence date and time Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

361 12.2 Error Messages Error Messages Messages may appear on the screen during operation, and this section explains these messages, and corrective action to take. If the corrective action requires service refer to your supplier. In addition to the following error messages, there are also communications related error messages. These are described in the separate Communications Interface User s Manual (IM E). There is the follow error type. CME (Command error) EXE (Execution error) DDE (Device error) QYE (Query error) Frame Controller Code Item Description 1000 Message FAN Alarm Trouble Fan alarm was detected. Operation Continues to operate. Cause The fan was stopped. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1001 Message Battery Error Trouble Battery is abnormal. Operation Continues to operate. Cause Remaining battery power is low. Action The battery must be replaced. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1002 Message Password Error Trouble Password error Operation Continues to operate. Cause The password that was input is incorrect. Action Check the password, and enter the correct one. Type EXE 1003 Message Slot Empty Trouble Module mounting error Operation Continues to operate. Cause The specified slot is empty. Action Check whether a module is present in the specified slot. Type DDE 1005 Message Temperature Error Trouble Internal temperature error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Internal temperature is excessively high. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 12-4

362 12.2 Error Messages Code Item Description 1006 Message Initialization Error Trouble Initialization error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Failed to initialize. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1007 Message Update Error Trouble Update error Operation Update stops. Continues to operate. Cause Failed to update. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1008 Message Memory Check Error Trouble Memory check error Operation Continues to operate. Cause An abnormality occurred during memory error check at start-up. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1010 Message No Media Trouble Media installation error Operation Continues to operate. Cause No media (e.g. compact flash memory card) is inserted. Action Insert a media. Type EXE 1011 Message Media Full Trouble Insufficient media capacity error Operation Continues to operate. Cause The media (e.g. compact flash memory card) has insufficient storage capacity. Action Delete some files to increase the free capacity or replace the media with another one. Type EXE 1012 Message Corrupt Error Trouble Media abnormality Operation Continues to operate. Cause The medium (compact flash, etc.) may be corrupt. Or, there are too many files. When the medium uses the FAT format, there are restrictions on the number of files. Action Delete files to reduce their number, or change the medium. Type EXE 1014 Message Soft Version Error Trouble Software version mismatch Operation Continues to operate. Cause The software version for the frame controller differs from that for the module. Action Update the software for the frame controller and module. For the latest version, contact your local sales dealer or YOKOGAWA s sales branch office. Type DDE Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

363 12.2 Error Messages Code Item Description 1015 Message Module Type Error Trouble Module type mismatch Operation Continues to operate. Cause The frame controller failed to identify the module. Action Update the frame controller s software. For the latest version, contact your local sales dealer or YOKOGAWA s sales branch office. Type DDE Note Error codes 1020 to 1099 are handled as remote command errors and mentioned in AQ2200 Remote Command Reference. 12-6

364 12.2 Error Messages Light Source Module Code Item Description 1101 Message Temperature Error Trouble Abnormal internal temperature Operation Continues to operate. Cause The temperature inside the module is excessively high. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1102 Message Update Error Trouble Update error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Failed to update. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1103 Message Not Running Trouble Module operation error Operation Continues to operate. Cause The light source module is not working. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1104 Message Light Output Limit Operation1 Trouble Optical output limit over (for laser light source 1) Operation Optical output turns OFF. Cause The optical output of the light source (device 1) exceeded the upper limit. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1105 Message Memory Check Error Trouble Memory check error Operation Program execution is stopped. Cause An abnormality was found during memory error check at start-up. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1106 Message Thermistor Temperature Error1 Trouble Abnormal thermistor temperature (for laser light source 1) Operation Continues to operate. Cause The thermistor detected abnormal temperature. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1107 Message Thermistor Temperature Error2 Trouble Abnormal thermistor temperature (for laser light source 2) Operation Continues to operate. Cause The thermistor detected abnormal temperature. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1108 Message PEL Over current Error1 Trouble Abnormal Peltier current (for laser light source 1) Operation Continues to operate. Cause Peltier drive current is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

365 12.2 Error Messages Code Item Description 1109 Message PEL Over current Error2 Trouble Abnormal Peltier current (for laser light source 2) Operation Continues to operate. Cause Peltier drive current is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1110 Message Temperature Limit Error Trouble Abnormal internal temperature Operation Turns OFF the power. Cause Internal temperature is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1111 Message Opt Lock Error Trouble Optical output lock error Operation Optical output cannot be turned ON. Cause Laser output is locked. Action Turn OFF the laser output lock. For details, refer to 11.1, Troubleshooting. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1112 Message Light Output Limit Operation 2 Trouble Optical output limit over (for laser light source 2) Operation Optical output turns OFF. Cause The optical output of the light source exceeded the upper limit. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 12-8

366 12.2 Error Messages TLS Module Code Item Description 1130 Message Temperature Error Trouble The temperature inside the module is excessively high. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1133 Message TEC Temperature Error Trouble The thermistor detected abnormal temperature. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1136 Message LD Over Current Error Trouble LD drive current is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1137 Message TLS EL Error Trouble TLS end limit error Action Turn OFF the power. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1138 Message TLS Initialization Error Trouble Failed to initialize to the setting. Action Turn OFF the power. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1139 Message TLS WL Caribration Error Trouble Failed to calibration to wavelength. Action Turn OFF the power. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1154 Message External Serial Communication Error Trouble External serial communication error. Action Check that cable is connected correctly, and other data is set correctly. Type DDE 1155 Message Wavelength Meter Type Error Trouble Illegal Wavelength Meter model error. Action Check the Wavelength Meter model, and set it again. Type EXE 1156 Message Convergence Error Trouble Correction (Convergence) cycle-over error Action Failed to convergence to wavelength. Check that cable is connected correctly. Type EXE 1157 Message Wavelength Over Error Trouble Sets the value of the wavelength range that are unavairable. Action Check the wavelength value, and sets the value of the wavelength range that are available. Type EXE 1158 Message Query Data Error Trouble Wavelength Meter command query error. Action Check the command and send it again. Type QYE 1159 Message LD is inactive Trouble Inactive optical output Action Turn OFF the power. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

367 12.2 Error Messages Code Item Description 1160 Message Temparature Limit Error Trouble The temperature inside the module is excessively high. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1162 Message Opt Lock Error Trouble Optical output ON command is sent in the Lock status. Action Move the cursor to Lock in the SYSTEM screen to switch to OFF. Type EXE 1163 Message Sweep Parameter Error1 Trouble Start WL setting is larger than Stop WL. Action Check the Start WL value,and set it again. Type EXE 1164 Message Sweep Parameter Error2 Trouble The number of sweep steps is 2001 or more in the Swept application. Action Sets the number of sweep steps to or less, and set it again. Type EXE 1165 Message Sweep Parameter Error3 Trouble Sweep speed is set, at which the sweep cannot be performed. Action Check the value, and set it again. Type EXE 1166 Message Sweep Parameter Error4 Trouble WLMC Mode is set at ON in the Continuous mode. Action Sets the WLMC(Wavelength Convergence) to off. Type EXE 12-10

368 12.2 Error Messages Sensor Module Code Item Description 1200 Message Memory Check Error Trouble Memory check error Operation Program execution is stopped. Cause An abnormality occurred during memory check. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1201 Message Flash Rom Write Error Trouble Flash ROM writing error Operation Stops writing to the ROM. Cause Failed to write to the flash ROM. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1202 Message Header Error Trouble Type error Operation Identifies the module as AQ and continues to operate. Cause Failed to identify the sensor head type correctly. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1203 Message Temperature Error Trouble Abnormal internal temperature Operation Continues to operate. Cause The internal temperature is excessively high. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1204 Message Update Error Trouble Update error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Failed to update. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1205 Message Not Running Trouble Module operation error Operation Continues to operate. Cause The module is not working. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1206 Message No Head Trouble Sensor head error Operation Continues to operate. Cause The sensor head is not connected. Action Make sure that the sensor head is connected. Type DDE 1207 Message Temperature Limit Error Trouble Abnormal internal temperature Operation Turns OFF the power. Cause Internal temperature is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

369 12.2 Error Messages Code Item Description 1260 Message PD Module Error1 Trouble Peltier temperature error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Peltier temperature is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1261 Message PD Module Error2 Trouble Peltier current error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Peltier drive current is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1262 Message PD Module Error3 Trouble Abnormal Peltier control IC temperature Operation Continues to operate. Cause The temperature for Peltier control IC is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1263 Message Zero set Error1 Trouble Zero set error 1 Operation Cancels the zero set operation and then continues to operate. Cause Light is not blocked completely during zero setting. Action Make sure that the light is blocked, and then perform zero reset again. Type DDE 1264 Message Zero set Error2 Trouble Zero set error 2 Operation Cancels the zero set operation and then continues to operate. Cause The hardware is abnormal. Action Restart the unit, and then perform zero reset. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1265 Message OPT Mode Error Trouble Modulation mode error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Optical signal with CHOP mode frequency different from the specified frequency was input. Action Check the CHOP frequency setting. Type DDE 1266 Message Input Power Over Trouble Maximum light input power error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Light exceeding the maximum light input level was input. Action Decrease the light input power below the maximum light input level. Type DDE 1268 Message A/D Read Error Trouble A/D read error Operation Cancels measurement and continues to operate. Cause The sensor module hardware is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1269 Message Trigger Ignored Trouble Trigger mode error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Remote measurement command was received during trigger input mode. Action Check the measurement mode. Type EXE 12-12

370 12.2 Error Messages ATTN Module Code Item Description 1301 Message Temperature Error Trouble Abnormal internal temperature Operation Continues to operate. Cause The internal temperature is excessively high. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1302 Message Update Error Trouble Update error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Failed to update. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1303 Message Not Running Trouble Module operation error Operation Continues to operate. Cause The ATTN module is not working. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1304 Message Initialization Error Trouble Initialization error Operation Program execution is stopped. Cause Failed to initialize. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1305 Message Memory Check Error Trouble Memory check error Operation Program execution is stopped. Cause An abnormality occurred during memory check. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1306 Message Temperature Limit Error Trouble Abnormal internal temperature Operation Turns OFF the power. Cause Internal temperature is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1307 Message Over Current Error Trouble Current error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Abnormal module drive current Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Message DDE 1363 Message Zero set Error1 Trouble Zero set error 1 Operation Cancels the zero set operation and then continues to operate. Cause Light is not blocked completely during zero setting. Action Make sure that the light is blocked, and then perform zero reset again. Type DDE Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

371 12.2 Error Messages Code Item Description 1364 Message Zero set Error2 Trouble Zero set error 2 Operation Cancels the zero set operation and then continues to operate. Cause The hardware is abnormal. Action Restart the unit, and then perform zero reset. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1366 Message Input Power Over Trouble Maximum light input power error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Light exceeding the maximum light input level was input. Action Decrease the light input power below the maximum light input level. Type DDE 12-14

372 12.2 Error Messages XFP Interface Module Code Item Description 1600 Message Memory Check Error Trouble An abnormality occurred during memory check. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exit, service maybe necessary. Type DDE 1601 Message Flash Rom Write Error Trouble Failed to write to the flash ROM. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exit, service maybe necessary. Type DDE 1603 Message Temperature Error Trouble The internal temperature is excessively high. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exit, service maybe necessary. Type DDE 1604 Message Update Error Trouble Failed to update. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exit, service maybe necessary. Type DDE 1605 Message Not Running Trouble Module operation error Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exit, service maybe necessary. Type DDE 1607 Message Temperature Limit Error Trouble Internal temperature is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exit, service maybe necessary. Type DDE 1660 Message I2C Communication Error Trouble CRC/NAK error detected during communication with the XFP Transceiver. Action Check whether the XFP transceiver is correctly installed. If the problem still exit, service maybe necessary. Type DDE 1661 Message No XFP Module Trouble XFP Transceiver not installed. Action Install the XFP Transceiver on the XFP interface module. Type EXE 1662 Message Opt Lock Error Trouble Optical output ON command is sent in the Lock status. Action Move the cursor to Lock in the SYSTEM screen to switch to OFF. Type EXE 1663 Message XFP Power Voltage Error Trouble There is a problem with the power being supplied to the XFP Transceiver. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exit, service maybe necessary. Type DDE 1664 Message Password Error Trouble Input password mismatch, or specified page cannot be selected. Action Check the password or page number, then reenter. Type EXE Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

373 12.2 Error Messages OSW Module Code Item Description 1401 Message Temperature Error Trouble Abnormal internal temperature Operation Continues to operate. Cause The internal temperature is excessively high. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1402 Message Update Error Trouble Update error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Failed to update. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1403 Message Not Running Trouble Module operation error Operation Continues to operate. Cause The OSW module is not working. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1405 Message Memory Check Error Trouble Memory check error Operation Program execution is stopped. Cause An abnormality occurred during memory check. Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1406 Message Temperature Limit Error Trouble Abnormal internal temperature Operation Turns OFF the power. Cause Internal temperature is abnormal. Action Turn OFF the power, and check that the ventilation holes on the unit are not blocked. After a while, restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Type DDE 1407 Message Over Current Error Trouble Current error Operation Continues to operate. Cause Abnormal module drive current Action Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to restart the unit. If the problem still exist, service may be necessary. Message DDE 12-16

374 12.3 Replacing the Module The module mounted on this unit is applicable to insertion/removal of the module with the power kept turned ON and recognition of the module. Removing the Module You can remove the mounted module with the power kept turned ON. After the module has been removed, the alarm appears. If this happens, press <OK>. 1. Remove the module from Slot Press <OK>. Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection 12 CAUTION If the module is removed while the application is running, this may cause the unit to malfunction

375 12.3 Replacing the Module Mounting the Module You can mount the module with the power kept turned ON. Follow the steps below to have this unit recognize the module you have mounted. 1. Mount the module in a blank slot. Blank slot. 2. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Insert Module and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key

376 3. The Check popup screen will appear. Press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. As the module is recognized, the screen returns to the previous screen Replacing the Module Module recognition status Note The error may appear on the screen immediately after the module has been recognized. This error shows that the proper specifications may not be satisfied or a part of operation may malfunction due to difference in release timing between the module software and frame controller software. If this error appears, take appropriate measures, such as updating of the software. Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

377 12.4 Updating the Firmware To improve module lineup and add/correct functions, update of the firmware may be necessary. The update method is explained below. Items Required Frame controller (this unit) Modules to be updated Compact flash memory card (with the latest firmware) Obtaining the Firmware The unit may not work correctly unless the firmware is updated to the latest version. When updating the firmware of a module or purchasing a newly released module, you must also update the firmware of the frame controller. The latest editions of firmware are available to registered customers for download from our Web site. You can register from the following web page. Update for the Frame Controller 1. Check that necessary cables including the power cord are connected, and then turn ON the power. 2. After the frame controller starts up, insert the CompactFlash memory or USB flash memory containing the latest firmware into the rear panel of the frame controller. Or, use the USB storage function to transfer the latest firmware to the instrument's temporary storage memory. 3. Press the <SYSTEM> key to display the SYSTEM screen. 4. With the cursor key, move the cursor to UPDATE, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key

378 12.4 Updating the Firmware 5. The UPDATE popup screen will appear. Move the cursor to Main Frame, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Update popup screen will appear. 6. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Main Frame and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Select Memory popup screen will appear. 7. Select the storage device on which the update file is stored. 8. Press the [ENTER] key. If no update file is found, a Error Message is displayed. Check once again whether the update file is in the medium. If you attempt to upgrade to a version of the firmware prior to the current version, a screen message is displayed. To accept the "downgrade," press <OK>. Otherwise press <Cancel>. 9. The following update start confirmation screen will appear. Check that the frame software version is correct, then press the <Start> or [ENTER] key. Update will start. Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

379 12.4 Updating the Firmware 10. Update is complete when the screen appears. Turn OFF the power, then turn it ON again and check the software version. Update has been completed successfully if the new software version is shown. For the software version, see Displaying the Unit Information. Frame Controller Update Complete Screen Error when the Selected Storage Device Contains No Firmware Downversion Confirmation Screen 12-22

380 12.4 Updating the Firmware Update for Modules Module Selection Screen and Function Explanation This screen allows selection of the module to be updated. Label Slot No. Checkbox Module name Current software version Selected software version Update Module Selection Screen Label: Displays the frame No. 0 indicates the frame controller. Checkbox: Used to select/deselect the modules to be updated. indicates that the module is selected, and indicates that the module is not selected. Selection/deselection can be made by pressing the <Select> key. Slot No.: Displays the slot No. Module name: Displays the name of the mounted module. NO MODULE will be displayed if module is not mounted. Current software version: Displays the software version of the currently mounted module. Selected software version: Displays the version of the software that is contained in the selected storage device and suitable for the module. (If two or more software versions exist, the largest version No. or the selected version No. will be displayed.) None will be displayed if the selected storage device does not contain software suitable for the module. <Select>: Used to select the modules that are not currently selected and deselect the ones that are. If NO MODULE is displayed, or if software compatible with the module is not found in the selected storage device, it is displayed in thin characters. <Ver>: Used to select the software version suitable for the module. If this key is pressed, Update Version Selection Screen will appear. If NO MODULE is displayed, or if software compatible with the module is not found in the selected storage device, it is displayed in thin characters. <OK>: Used to start update if more than one checkbox is selected. The name of this key will be thin if no checkboxes are selected. <Cancel>: Returns to the SYSTEM screen. Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

381 12.4 Updating the Firmware Update Version Selection Screen and Function Explanation If two or more software versions exist for the selected module, Version Selection Screen will appear, add the version to which the current version is to be updated can be selected. Update Version Selection Screen Update version selection screen: Displays all the software versions that are contained in the selected storage device and suitable for the module. Locate the cursor to the desired version using the cursor keys, and then press the <OK> key to select it. <OK>: Selects the version displayed at the cursor position. <Cancel>: Returns to the update module selection screen. Update Procedure 1. Mount the module to be updated into the frame controller. 2. Check that necessary cables including the power cord are connected, and then turn ON the power. 3. After the frame controller starts up, insert the CompactFlash memory or USB flash memory containing the latest firmware into the rear panel of the frame controller. Or, use the USB storage function to transfer the latest firmware to the instrument s temporary storage memory. 4. When the frame controller has started up, press the <SYSTEM> key to display the SYSTEM screen. 5. Move the cursor to UPDATE with the cursor key and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 6. The UPDATE popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Module and press the [ENTER] key. The module update screen will appear

382 12.4 Updating the Firmware 7. Place the cursor on the memory on which the update file is stored and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. The Select Memory shortcut menu is displayed. Select a storage device. 8. Press the [ENTER] key. The update confirmation screen will appear. 9. With the cursor key, move the cursor using the cursor key to Module, and press the <Select> key to select the module to be updated. (By default, all the modules are selected if the corresponding software is stored in the selected storage device.) If two or more software versions exist in the selected storage device, press the <Ver> or [ENTER] key to display Update Version Selection Screen. Move the cursor using the cursor key to the desired version, and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. 10. Press the <OK> key to display the update confirm screen. Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection 12 Update Confirm Screen 12-25

383 12.4 Updating the Firmware Downversion Confirm Screen appears only when switching the firmware to an older version. Check the version, and press the <OK> key to continue. If you want to cancel, press the <Cancel> key. Downversion Confirm Screen 11. Press the <OK> key to start update. 12. Update is complete when Update Complete Screen appears. Turn OFF the power, then turn it ON again and check the software version. Update has been completed successfully if the new software version is shown. For the software version, see section Displaying the Unit Information. Update Complete Screen CAUTION When performing update, the following precautions must be observed. In the worst case, the built-in software may be damaged, disabling restart. Do not turn OFF the power or insert/remove modules, compact flash memory card or USB flash memory during update. Do not decode or modify the update software. For update, always use the latest version. All the settings on the updated devices will be reset to the default settings. If necessary, save the settings before performing update

384 12.4 Updating the Firmware Displaying the Unit Information The unit information is displayed in the following format. The information is displayed in the following format. However, the contents may vary depending on the unit. Manufacture company Product model Serial No. Software version Order code Special code Hardware version FPGA version Connector Applicable fiber Wavelength Option Displaying the Frame Information The information about the hardware and software of the frame controller is displayed. Follow the steps below to check the frame information. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key to display the SYSTEM screen. 2. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Information and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key. Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection Frame Information Display Screen

385 12.4 Updating the Firmware 3. The information about Frame controller is shown. You can scroll the screen with the cursor key, or <More Info>. 4. After checking, press the <OK> or [CANCEL] key. Displaying the Unit Information of the Module The unit information of the mounted module is displayed. 1. Set a module you want to display the unit information to the current module with the [CHAN] key. 2. Press <Menu>. 3. The Setting Menu popup screen will appear. Move the cursor using the cursor key to Information and press the <OK> or [ENTER] key

386 4. The display may slightly vary depending on the mounted module. <Optical Sensor Head is Mounted> 12.4 Updating the Firmware The Module Information1 popup screen appears. The unit information of the module is displayed on this screen. You can scroll the screen with the cursor key, or <More Info>. When pressing <More Device>, the unit information of the optical sensor head is displayed as Module Information2. Check the information in the same manner as described for Module Information1. <Optical Sensor Head is Not Mounted> The Module Information popup screen appears. The unit information of the module is displayed on this screen. You can scroll the screen with the cursor key, or <More Info>. Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection After checking, press the <OK> or [ENTER] key

387 12.5 Routine Maintenance Notes Before Storage Dust, fingerprints, dirt and stains etc. collected on the instrument must be wiped off with a piece of cloth. For the method for cleaning the exterior of the instrument, refer to Cleaning the Main Unit and Module. Carry out operation inspection to check that the instrument operates correctly. Storage Conditions When storing the instrument for a long period of time, make sure it is stored under the following environmental conditions. Temperature -20 to 60 C (5 to 40 C during measurement) Humidity 20 to 80%RH Location Temperature/humidity should not change excessively throughout the day. The instrument should not be stored in the following areas or under the following conditions, since doing so may cause breakdown. Areas where the instrument will be exposed to direct sunlight or excessive dust High-humidity areas where water drops are generated or collect on the instrument Areas where the instrument will be exposed to active gases or oxidized Notes on Reuse When using the instrument again after storing it for a long period of time, first carry out operation inspection to check that the instrument operates correctly

388 12.5 Routine Maintenance Inspection for BERT Module It is recommended to carry out the daily maintenance and inspection to test a part of the specifications in order to make sure that this module functions correctly. Calibration Cycle It is recommended to check the performance of the module related to the environmental conditions in the specifications once a year according to the performance test described below. Performance Test After the inspection has been completed, the performance results are recorded in the performance test record sheet. The performance test record sheet is a list stating all tested specifications and allowable limits. The test result records are used to compare the data after completion of the periodic maintenance, troubleshooting, repair, and adjustment. Recommended Test Instruments The following list shows the measuring instruments necessary to carry out the performance test. Measuring instruments, which have the performance and functionality better than those shown in the following list, can be used as alternative instruments. Recommended Test Instruments Name Required Performance Recommended Model Digital oscilloscope Digital Communications Analyzer 86100A manufactured by Agilent Dual Channel 50 GHz Electrical 83484A manufactured by Agilent Plug-In Module Phase shifter (3.5 mm-connector type) HLS-JJ-13 manufactured by Hirose Electric Attenuator 10 db (3.5 mm-connector type) 41KC-10 manufacture by INMET 20 db (3.5 mm-connector type) 41KC-20 manufactured by INMET Coaxial cable 3.5 mm-connector type SMA connector type Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

389 12.5 Routine Maintenance General Functional Test (BER Measurement) Description In this test, the BER measurement is performed by reflection of PPG-ED to verify that the module of the SG-PPG-ED (CDR) functions correctly. Specifications No error occurs after measured for 5 min. Procedures 1. Insert a 10dB-attenuator to the DATAIN1 terminal (with built-in CDR) of the ED of the AQ Gbit/s BERT Module (hereafter referred to as AQ GBERT Module ), and connect to the DATA OUT terminal of the PPG with the coaxial cable. 2. Set the AQ GBERT Module as described below. PPGIF: Electric Setup: Couple Data offset: 0.00 V Pattern: PRBS Data cross point: 50 % PRBS length: PRBS31 Clock source: Internal Error mode: Single Bitrate: Gbit/s Logic: Positive Bitrate offset: 0 ppm Meas mode: Single Clock offset: 0.00 V Meas day: 0 day Input select: DataIn 1(CDR) Meas time: 5 min Data threshold: 0 mv Disp mode: Current Auto sync: ON 3. Set the Data amplitude of the AQ GBERT Module to 0.5 V and start the BER measurement. 4. In the same manner as described above, set the Data amplitude to 2.0 V and start the BER measurement. Connection Diagram ATT DATA IN1 (CDR) DATA OUT ATT10 db 41KC-10 SF 104/2x11PC mm coaxial cable 12-32

390 12.5 Routine Maintenance General Functional Test (BER Measurement) Description In this test, the BER measurement is performed by reflection of PPG-ED to verify that the module of the SG-PPG-ED (without CDR) functions correctly. Specifications No error occurs after measured for 5 min. Procedures 1. Insert a 10 db-attenuator to the DATAIN2 terminal (without CDR) of the ED of the AQ GBERT Module, and connect to the DATA OUT terminal with the coaxial cable. 2. Insert a phase shifter to the CLOCK IN terminal of the ED of the AQ GBERT Module, and connect to the CLOCK OUT terminal with the coaxial cable. 3. Set the AQ GBERT Module as described below. PPGIF: Electric Setup: Couple Data offset: 0.00 V Pattern: PRBS Data cross point: 50 % PRBS length: PRBS31 Clock source: Internal Error mode: Single Bitrate: Gbit/s Logic: Positive Bitrate offset: 0 ppm Meas mode: Single Clock offset: 0.00 V Meas day: 0 day Input select: DataIn 2 Meas time: 5 min Data threshold: 0 mv Disp mode: Current Auto sync: ON 4. Set the Data amplitude of the AQ GBERT Module to 0.5 V and start the BER measurement. 5. In the same manner as described above, set the Data amplitude to 2.0 V and start the BER measurement. Connection Diagram DATA OUT ATT Phase shifter DATA IN2 ATT10 db 41KC-10 Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection 12 SF 104/2x11PC mm coaxial cable 12-33

391 12.5 Routine Maintenance Output Waveform Test Description This test is intended to check that the output waveform of the DATA OUT of the PPG is within the specification range. Specifications The output waveform must be within the specification range. Eye Amp: Data amplitude ±5% ±0.1 V Eye SN: Reference value is 15 or more (phase is 40 to 60%). Procedures 1. Insert a 20 db-attenuator into the input terminal of the oscilloscope and connect to the DATA OUT terminal of the PPG of the AQ GBERT Module with the coaxial cable. 2. Connect the TRIGGER OUT terminal of the AQ GBERT Module and trigger input terminal of the oscilloscope with the coaxial cable. 3. Set the AQ GBERT Module as described below. PPGIF: Electric Pattern: PRBS Clock source: Internal PRBS length: PRBS31 Bitrate: Gbit/s Error mode: Single Bitrate offset: 0 ppm Logic: Positive Clock offset: 0.00 V Meas mode: Manual Setup: PPG Trigger: TX1/16 4. With the Data amplitude, Data offset, and Data cross point settings of the AQ GBERT Module combined as shown below, check the waveform with the oscilloscope. Combination A B C D E F Data amplitude 0.5 V 2.0 V 2.0 V 2.0 V 2.0 V 2.0 V Data offset 0 V 0 V -2 V +3 V 0 V 0 V Data cross point 50% 50% 50% 50% 30% 70% Connection Diagram DATA OUT TRIGGER OUT A T T ATT20 db 41KC-20 Sucoflex104 (L=0.7 m) coaxial cable 12-34

392 12.5 Routine Maintenance Input Sensitivity Test Description This test is intended to check that the input sensitivity of the DATA IN of the ED is within the specification range. Specifications The input sensitivity performance must be 0.1 V or more. (Since the 20 db-att is inserted into the input, no error occurs for 5 min. when the Data amplitude is set at 1.0V or less.) Procedures 1. Insert a 20 db-attenuator into the DATAIN1 terminal (built into CDR) of the ED of the AQ GBERT Module and connect to the DATA OUT terminal of the PPG with the coaxial cable. 2. Make the settings for the AQ GBERT Module as follows: PPGIF: Electric Setup: Couple Data offset: 0.00 V Pattern: PRBS Data cross point: 50 % PRBS length: PRBS31 Clock source: Internal Error mode: Single Bitrate: Gbit/s Logic: Positive Bitrate offset: 0 ppm Meas mode: Single Clock offset: 0.00 V Meas day: 0 day Input select: DataIn 1(CDR) Meas time: 5 min Data threshold: 0 mv Disp mode: Current Auto sync: ON 3. Perform the BER measurement by changing the Data amplitude of the AQ GBERT Module to 2.0 V to 0.5 V variably. Connection Diagram DATA OUT ATT DATA IN1 (CDR) ATT 20dB 41KC-20 SF 104/2x11PC mm coaxial cable Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

393 12.5 Routine Maintenance Performance Test Record Sheet AQ Gabit/s BERT Module Place: Temperature: Humidity: Manufacture No.: Tested by: Approved by: Date: Description of Test Results Min. Actual Max. (1) BER measurement (CDR) Data amplitude = 2.0 V - BER<0*10^-12 - Data amplitude = 0.5 V - BER<0*10^-12 - (2) BER measurement Data amplitude = 2.0 V - BER<0*10^-12 - Data amplitude = 0.5 V - BER<0*10^-12 - (4) Input sensitivity test Description of Test Eye Amp Eye SN (3) Output waveform test A) Data amplitude = 0.5 V, Data offset = 0 V, Data cross point = 50% B) Data amplitude = 2.0 V, Data offset = 0 V, Data cross point = 50% C) Data amplitude = 2.0 V, Data offset = -2 V, Data cross point = 50% D) Data amplitude = 2.0 V, Data offset = +3 V, Data cross point = 50% E) Data amplitude = 2.0 V, Data offset = 0 V, Data cross point = 30% F) Data amplitude = 2.0 V, Data offset = 0 V, Data cross point = 70% Test Conditions AQ settings Bitrate Test coding (number of PRBS steps) AQ Wavelength of LD light source AQ /622 LD input power Auto Bias Control Amplitude of electric input Gbit/s PRBS nm or 1310 nm dbm ON status 500 mvpp±100 mvpp 12-36

394 12.5 Routine Maintenance Inspection for 10 Gbit/s Optical Modulator It is recommended to carry out the daily maintenance and inspection to test a part of the specifications in order to make sure that this module functions correctly. Calibration Cycle It is recommended to check the performance of the module related to the environmental conditions in the specifications once a year according to the performance test described below. Performance Test After the inspection has been completed, the performance results are recorded in the performance test record sheet. The performance test record sheet is a list stating all tested specifications and allowable limits. The test result records are used to compare the data after completion of the periodic maintenance, troubleshooting, repair, and adjustment. Recommended Test Instruments The following list shows the measuring instruments necessary to carry out the performance test. Measuring instruments, which have the performance and functionality better than those shown in the following list, can be used as alternative instruments. Recommended test instruments Name Required Performance Recommended Model AQ Gbit/s BERT AQ is specified. AQ DFB LD (option PMF) AQ is specified. Digital oscilloscope Main unit 86100B manufactured by Agilent Optical input channel (DC to 28 GHz) 86106B manufactured by Agilent Optical fixed attenuator 10 db Optical fiber Single mode fiber Optical power meter Wavelength band: 700 to 1700 nm AQ2140/AQ2733 manufactured Measurement range: Up to +10 dbm by ANDO Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

395 12.5 Routine Maintenance Output Optical Waveform Test Description This test is intended to check that the optical output waveform of the OPT OUT is within the specification range. Specifications Extinction ratio: 12 db or more Procedures 1. Connect the output terminal of the AQ DFB LD Module (hereafter referred to as AQ DFB LD ) and the LD IN terminal of the AQ / Gbit/s Optical Modulator (hereafter referred to as AQ /622 EO ) with the PMF fiber (optional). 2. Connect the DATA OUT (TO OPTICAL MODULATOR) terminal of the AQ Gbit/s BERT Module (hereafter referred to as AQ GBERT ) and the DATA IN terminal of the AQ /622 EO with the U-link (optional). 3. Set the PPG of the AQ GBERT as follows. Interface: Optic 4. Press the OUTPUT ON button on the AQ G BERT to output the electric signal. 5. Press the OUTPUT ON button on the AQ DFB LD to output the optical signal. 6. Run Preset from the GUI screen of the AQ /622 EO. 7. Check with the oscilloscope that relevant output satisfies the specified value. To protect the oscilloscope, insert an optical ATT with an attenuation level of 5dB or more or use the output power variable change function of the AQ For the trigger signal to be supplied to the oscilloscope, use the 10 GHz-band clock out of the AQ Connection Diagram AQ DFB Setup conditions: Optput Power: +13 dbm Wavelength: m when AQ is used m when AQ is used PMF AQ / Gbit/s OPTICAL MODULATOR Setup conditions: Auto Bias Ctrl: ON ABC Slope: Positive Adjust the settings of Driver Gain and Cross Point as required. * Execute Preset prior to the test. AQ gGbit/s BERT MODULE Setup conditions: Bitrate: Gbit/s Interface: Optic Pattern: PRBS31 LOGIC: Positive PPG DATA OUT (TO OPTICAL MODULATOR) DATA IN LD IN OPT OUT U-Link 86106B 10 Gb/s Reference Receiver (Agilent) Setup conditions: Sample Bandwidth: 28.0 GHz Wavelength: m when AQ is used 10 db m when AQ is used optical ATT Attenuation Factor: 10 decibel SMF (1 m or less) 10 db ATT 86100A Digital Communications Analyzer (Agilent) Setup conditions: Time scale: 20 ps/div Trigger Input: Front panel CLOCK OUT * Always use the optional U-link and PMF fiber (sold separately)

396 12.5 Routine Maintenance Optical Insertion Loss Test Description This test is intended to check that the optical output of the OPT OUT is within the specification range. Specifications Insertion loss: 10 db or less (including mark ratio 1/2 modulation loss) Procedures 1. Measure the output power (P0 [dbm]) of the AQ DFB LD. (To protect the power meter, use the optical ATT or output power variable change function of the AQ DFB LD.) 2. Connect the output terminal of the AQ DFB LD and the LD IN terminal of the AQ /622 EO with the PMF fiber (optional). 3. Connect the DATA OUT (TO OPTICAL MODULATOR) terminal of the AQ GBERT and the DATA IN terminal of the AQ /622 EO with the U-link (optional). 4. Set the PPG of the AQ GBERT as follows. Interface: Optic 5. Press the OUTPUT ON button on the AQ G BERT to output the electric signal. 6. Press the OUTPUT ON button on the AQ DFB LD to output the optical signal. 7. Run Preset from the GUI screen of the AQ /622 EO. 8. With the power meter, measure the average power (P1 [dbm]) of the modulation signal. 9. Calculate P0-P1 and check that the insertion loss satisfies the above specification. Connection Diagram AQW DFB Setup conditions: Optput Power: +13 dbm Wavelength: m when AQ is used m when AQ is used AQ /622 10G bit/s OPTICAL MODULATOR Setup conditions: Auto Bias Ctrl: ON ABC Slope: Positive Adjust the settings of Driver Gain and Cross Point as required. * Execute Preset prior to the test. AQ Gbit/s BERT MODULE Setup conditions: Bitrate: Gbit/s Interface: Optic Pattern: PRBS31 LOGIC: Positive PPG DATA OUT (TO OPTICAL MODULATOR) U-Link PMF DATA IN LD IN OPT OUT Optical Power Meter SMF (1m or less) Measure the output of DFB LD (P0) by the optical power meter first. Then measure the output of OPT MOD (P1) by the optical power meter under the configuration shown in the left diagram. Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection 12 * Always use the optional U-link and PMF fiber (sold separately)

397 12.5 Routine Maintenance Performance Test Record Sheet AQ /622 OPTICAL MODULATOR Place: Temperature: Humidity: Manufacture No.: Tested by: Approved by: Date: Description of Test Results Min. Actual Max. Extinction ratio - db - Insertion loss - db - Test Conditions AQ settings Bitrate Test coding (number of PRBS steps) AQ Wavelength of LD light source AQ /622 LD input power Auto Bias Control Amplitude of electric input Gbit/s PRBS nm or 1310 nm dbm ON status 500 mvpp±100 mvpp 12-40

398 12.5 Routine Maintenance Inspection for 10 Gbit/s Optical Receiver It is recommended to carry out the daily maintenance and inspection to test a part of the specifications in order to make sure that this module functions correctly. Calibration Cycle It is recommended to check the performance of the module related to the environmental conditions in the specifications once a year according to the performance test described below. Performance Test After the inspection has been completed, the performance results are recorded in the performance test record sheet. The performance test record sheet is a list stating all tested specifications and allowable limits. The test result records are used to compare the data after completion of the periodic maintenance, troubleshooting, repair, and adjustment. Recommended Test Instruments The following list shows the measuring instruments necessary to carry out the performance test. Measuring instruments, which have the performance and functionality better than those shown in the following list, can be used as alternative instruments. Recommended test instruments Name Required Performance Recommended Model AQ Gbit/s BERT AQ is specified. AQ DFB LD (option PMF) AQ is specified. AQ /622 OPTICAL MODULATOR AQ /622 is specified. Digital oscilloscope Main unit 86100B manufactured by Agilent Optical input channel (DC to 28 GHz) 86106B manufactured by Agilent Optical fixed attenuator 10 db Optical fiber Single mode fiber Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

399 12.5 Routine Maintenance Output Electric Waveform Test Description This test is intended to check that the electric output waveform of the DATA OUT is within the specification range. Specifications Output amplitude: 300 mv or greater Procedures 1. Connect the output terminal of the AQ DFB LD Module (hereafter referred to as AQ DFB LD ) and the LD IN terminal of the AQ / Gbit/s Optical Modulator (hereafter referred to as AQ /622 EO ) with the PMF fiber (optional). 2. Connect the DATA OUT (TO OPTICAL MODULATOR) terminal of the AQ Gbit/s BERT Module (hereafter referred to as AQ GBERT ) and the DATA IN terminal of the AQ /622 EO with the U-link (optional). 3. Connect the OPT OUT terminal of the AQ /622 EO and the OPT IN terminal of the AQ OPTICAL RECEIVER (hereafter referred to as AQ OE ) with the SMF having a length of approximately 1 m through an optical ATT with an attenuation level of 10dB. 4. Connect the DATA OUT terminal of the AQ OE to the oscilloscope. At this time, it is recommended to insert the ATT in order to protect the oscilloscope. 5. Set the PPG of the AQ GBERT as follows. Interface: Optic 6. Press the OUTPUT ON button on the AQ GBERT to output the electric signal. 7. Press the OUTPUT ON button on the AQ DFB LD to output the optical signal. 8. Run Preset from the GUI screen of the AQ /622 EO or the AQ OE. 9. Check with the oscilloscope that relevant output satisfies the specified value. For the trigger signal to be supplied to the oscilloscope, use the 10GHz-band clock out of the AQ

400 12.5 Routine Maintenance Connection Diagram AQ DFB Setup conditions: Optput Power: +13dBm Wavelength: m when AQ is used m when AQ is used PMF AQ / Gbit/s OPTICAL MODULATOR Setup conditions: Auto Bias Ctrl: ON DATA IN LD IN OPT OUT * Execute Preset prior to the test. AQ Gbit/s BERT MODULE Setup conditions: Bitrate: Gbit/s Interface: Optic Pattern: PRBS31 PPG DATA OUT (TO OPTICAL MODULATOR) CLOCK OUT U-Link Optical ATT for protection (Approx. 10 db) SMF (1 m or less) 10dB ATT 86100A Digital Communications Analyzer (Agilent) Setup conditions: Time scale: 20 ps/div Trigger Input: Front panel AQ Gbit/s OPTICAL RECIEVER Setup conditions: Data output: ON * Execute Preset prior to the test. DATA OUT OPT IN * Always use the optional U-link and PMF fiber (sold separately) B 10Gb/s Reference Receiver (Agilent) Setup conditions: Sample Bandwidth: 18.0GHz Attenuation Factor: 0 decibel Scale: 100 mv/div Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

401 12.5 Routine Maintenance Optical Reflection Test Description It is checked that no bit errors occur in this optical reflection test. Specifications No bit errors occur for 10 min. Procedures 1. Connect the output terminal of the AQ DFB LD and the LD IN terminal of the AQ /622 EO with the PMF fiber (optional). 2. Connect the DATA OUT (TO OPTICAL MODULATOR) terminal of the AQ GBERT and the DATA IN terminal of the AQ /622 EO with the U-link (optional). 3. Connect the OPT OUT terminal of the AQ /622 EO and the OPT IN terminal of the AQ OE with the SMF having a length of approximately 1m through an optical ATT with an attenuation level of 10 db. 4. Connect the DATA OUT terminal of the AQ OE and the DATA IN (CDR) terminal of the AQ GBERT with the U-link (optional). 5. Set the PPG of the AQ GBERT as follows. Interface: Optic 6. Press the OUTPUT ON button on the AQ GBERT to output the electric signal. 7. Press the OUTPUT ON button on the AQ DFB LD to output the optical signal. 8. Run Preset from the GUI screen of the AQ /622 EO or the AQ OE. 9. Check that no bit errors occur through the ED of the AQ GBERT

402 12.5 Routine Maintenance Connection Diagram AQ DFB Setup conditions: Optput Power: +13 dbm Wavelength: m when AQ is used m when AQ is used PMF AQ /622 10Gbit/s OPTICAL MODULATOR Setup conditions: Auto Bias Ctrl: ON ABC Slope: Positive Adjust the settings of Driver Gain and Cross Point as required. * Execute Preset prior to the test. AQ Gbit/s BERT MODULE Setup conditions: Bitrate: Gbit/s Interface: Optic Pattern: PRBS31 LOGIC: Positive PPG DATA OUT (TO OPTICAL MODULATOR) U-Link DATA IN LD IN OPT OUT ED DATA IN1(CDR) Optical ATT for protection (Approx. 10 db) Variable optical ATT as required CLOCK OUT U-Link AQ Gbit/s OPTICAL RECIEVER Setup conditions: DATA OUT Data output: ON OPT IN Adjust the settings of Data threshold as requited. * Execute Preset prior to the test. SMF (1 m or less) * Always use the optional U-link and PMF fiber (sold separately). Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

403 12.5 Routine Maintenance Performance Test Record Sheet AQ Gbit/s OPTICAL RECEIVER Place: Temperature: Humidity: Manufacture No.: Tested by: Approved by: Date: Description of Test Results Min. Actual Max. Amplitude of electric output - mvpp - BER measurement - No bit error shall occur. - Test Conditions AQ settings Bitrate Test coding (number of PRBS steps) AQ Wavelength of LD light source AQ /622 LD input power Auto Bias Control Amplitude of electric input ABC Bias Slope Gbit/s PRBS nm or 1310 nm dbm ON status 500 mvpp±100 mvpp AQ Optical input power DATA Threshold dbm Describe the optimal value

404 12.5 Routine Maintenance Cleaning the Main Unit and Module To operate this unit at its optimal operating level for an extended period of time and to prevent any trouble or malfunction, the daily maintenance is absolutely required. Clean the panel and exterior of the main unit, and the panel of the module with a cloth rag soaked in lukewarm water to remove the dirt, and then wipe them off with a dry cloth rag. With a dry cloth rag, clean the parts other than the panel surface of the module and electric interface. To clean the electric interface, blow the air to the electric interface using a spray gun to remove dust, and cover the terminals not in use with the terminator (for output terminals) or cap (for input terminals). CAUTION Before starting the maintenance, always turn OFF the power completely. Failure to do so may cause the unit to malfunction. Do not use any chemical, such as paint thinner, benzene, or alcohol. Doing so may cause discoloration or deterioration. Necessity to Clean the Optical Interface The optical connector is only an optical component, the optical transmission of which is exposed to the outside. Even a scratch on the end face, which cannot be checked visually, greatly affects its optical performance. Therefore, if the optical connector is connected improperly, if it is connected without removal of dust or dirt, or if it is cleaned improperly, this may cause the end face of the optical connector to be scratched. Additionally, to connect the optical connector, it is absolutely required to properly joint the ferrule cores of both optical connectors. An optical adaptor is used for the connection. However, if the connection is made with dust sticking to the ferrule side face or ferrule guide of the optical adaptor, the cores cannot be jointed correctly. In this status, the loss of the optical power, disturbance of the transmission mode, and/or optical reflection at the connection point may become large, causing the measurement not to be performed correctly. To prevent such troubles, when connecting the optical connector to the measuring instrument or other optical connector, it is necessary to make the correct connection and cleaning at the same time. When using this unit, clean the ferrule every time it is connected and the precision sleeve every time it is connected 30 times. In particular, when using the following optical connector, it is strongly recommended to clean it every time it is connected. Optical connector to be connected after metallic sleeve has been inserted. -> In particular, metallic sleeve worn-out particles may easily stick to the ferrule side face or end face. Optical connector made of ferule material to be easily worn-out, such as metallic ferrule or crystallized glass ferrule. -> Ferrule worn-out particle may be produced by connection and disconnection. Optical connector and sleeve, with which the plastic shell type optical connector is engaged repeatedly. -> Plastic worn-out particles may be produced easily during shell engagement. Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

405 12.5 Routine Maintenance Enlarged Photo of Correct Optical Connector Connection Part Enlarged Photo of Scratched Optical Connector Connection Part Optical Connector in Correct Joint Status Center axis deviates by dust. Optical Connector in Axis Deviation Status by Dust Cleaning the Optical Interface Tools Required for Cleaning. The following tools are needed to clean the optical interface. Isopropyl alcohol Cleaning paper Stick type cleaner Air spray Optical connector end face magnifying microscope WARNING Do not attempt to clean the optical connector or optical adaptor while the laser beam is being emitted. The laser beam is invisible. However, if the laser beam is in contact with your eye, this may cause eye injury, resulting in serious accident